[go: up one dir, main page]

US20080090797A1 - {Beta}-Lactamyl vasopression V1a antagonists and methods of use - Google Patents

{Beta}-Lactamyl vasopression V1a antagonists and methods of use Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20080090797A1
US20080090797A1 US11/874,012 US87401207A US2008090797A1 US 20080090797 A1 US20080090797 A1 US 20080090797A1 US 87401207 A US87401207 A US 87401207A US 2008090797 A1 US2008090797 A1 US 2008090797A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
alkyl
acid
amino
optionally
compounds
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US11/874,012
Inventor
Gary Koppel
Robert Bruns
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Azevan Pharmaceuticals Inc
Original Assignee
Azevan Pharmaceuticals Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Azevan Pharmaceuticals Inc filed Critical Azevan Pharmaceuticals Inc
Priority to US11/874,012 priority Critical patent/US20080090797A1/en
Publication of US20080090797A1 publication Critical patent/US20080090797A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D413/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D413/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing three or more hetero rings
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/02—Stomatological preparations, e.g. drugs for caries, aphtae, periodontitis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/04—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for ulcers, gastritis or reflux esophagitis, e.g. antacids, inhibitors of acid secretion, mucosal protectants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/06—Anti-spasmodics, e.g. drugs for colics, esophagic dyskinesia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/08—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for nausea, cinetosis or vertigo; Antiemetics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/12—Antidiarrhoeals
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/02—Nasal agents, e.g. decongestants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/06—Antiasthmatics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A61P13/02—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of urine or of the urinary tract, e.g. urine acidifiers
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A61P13/08—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of the prostate
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A61P13/10—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of the bladder
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P15/00—Drugs for genital or sexual disorders; Contraceptives
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P15/00—Drugs for genital or sexual disorders; Contraceptives
    • A61P15/06—Antiabortive agents; Labour repressants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/04—Antipruritics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/06—Antipsoriatics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/02—Drugs for skeletal disorders for joint disorders, e.g. arthritis, arthrosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/04—Drugs for skeletal disorders for non-specific disorders of the connective tissue
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/08—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/08—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease
    • A61P19/10—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease for osteoporosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P21/00—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/04—Centrally acting analgesics, e.g. opioids
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/06—Antimigraine agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/08—Antiepileptics; Anticonvulsants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/14—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
    • A61P25/16—Anti-Parkinson drugs
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/18—Antipsychotics, i.e. neuroleptics; Drugs for mania or schizophrenia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/22—Anxiolytics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/24—Antidepressants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/30—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abuse or dependence
    • A61P25/32—Alcohol-abuse
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/30—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abuse or dependence
    • A61P25/36—Opioid-abuse
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02—Ophthalmic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A61P29/02—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID] without antiinflammatory effect
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/08—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
    • A61P3/10—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A61P31/14—Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • A61P31/18—Antivirals for RNA viruses for HIV
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
    • A61P37/06—Immunosuppressants, e.g. drugs for graft rejection
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/08—Antiallergic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00—Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00—Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A61P7/02—Antithrombotic agents; Anticoagulants; Platelet aggregation inhibitors
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/04—Inotropic agents, i.e. stimulants of cardiac contraction; Drugs for heart failure
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/08—Vasodilators for multiple indications
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D409/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D409/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D413/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D413/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D413/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing three or more hetero rings

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to novel 2-(azetidin-2-on-1-yl)alkanedioic acid derivatives as vasopressin V 1a receptor antagonists.
  • the present invention also relates to methods of treating mammals in need of relief from disease states associated with and responsive to the antagonism of the vasopressin V 1a receptor.
  • Vasopressin a neurohypophyseal neuropeptide produced in the hypothalamus, is involved in water metabolism homeostasis, renal function, mediation of cardiovascular function, non-opioid mediation of tolerance for pain, and regulation of temperature in mammals.
  • vasopressin acts as a neurotransmitter in the brain.
  • Three vasopressin receptor subtypes, designated V 1a , V 1b , and V 2 have been identified.
  • the human V 1a receptor has been cloned (Thibonnier et al., The Journal of Biological Chemistry, 269(5), 3304-3310 (1994)), and has been shown by radioligand binding techniques to be present in vascular smooth muscle cells, hepatocytes, blood platelets, lymphocytes and monocytes, type II pneumocytes, adrenal cortex, brain, reproductive organs, retinal epithelium, renal mesangial cells, and the A10, A7r5, 3T3 and WRK-1 cell lines (Thibonnier, Neuroendocrinology of the Concepts in Neurosurgery Series 5, (Selman, W., ed), 19-30, Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore, (1993)).
  • vasopressin agonists Sawyer, Pharmacol. Reviews, 13, 255 (1961)
  • vasopressin peptide antagonists include butyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phen
  • the invention also describes a method for treating a disease state responsive to the antagonism of a vasopressin V 1a receptor, in a mammal in need of such treatment, comprising the step of administering to the mammal a pharmaceutically effective amount of such 2-(azetidin-2-on-1-yl)alkanedioic acid derivatives.
  • n is an integer from 0 to 2;
  • A is R 6 O—, monosubstituted amino, or disubstituted amino
  • A′ is R 6′ O—, monosubstituted amino, or disubstituted amino
  • R 2 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl
  • R 3 is a structure selected from the group consisting of
  • R 4 is C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, C 3 -C 9 cycloalkenyl, limonenyl, pinenyl, C 1 -C 3 alkanoyl, optionally-substituted aryl, optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl(C 2 -C 4 alkenyl), or optionally-substituted aryl(C 2 -C 4 alkynyl);
  • R 6 and R 6′ are each independently selected from the group consisting of C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, (C 1 -C 4 alkoxy)-(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), a first heterocycle Y—, Y—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), a second heterocycle Y′—, Y′—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), R 7 R 8 N—(C 2 -C 4 alkyl), and R 7 R 8 N—(C 2 -C 4 alkyl);
  • R 7 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl
  • R 8 is C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, optionally-substituted aryl, or optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl); or
  • R 7′ is hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl
  • R 8′ is C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, optionally-substituted aryl, or optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl); or
  • R 7′ and R 8′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, and homopiperazinyl; where said piperazinyl or homopiperazinyl is optionally N -substituted with R 12′ ;
  • R 10 and R 11 are each independently chosen from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxycarbonyl, C 1 -C 5 alkanoyloxy, benzyloxy, benzoyloxy, diphenylmethoxy, triphenylmethoxy, optionally-substituted aryl, and optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl);
  • R 12 and R 12′ are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxycarbonyl, optionally-substituted aryloxycarbonyl, optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and optionally-substituted aryloyl; and
  • A′ is not anilinyl, substituted anilinyl, benzylamino, or substituted benzylamino.
  • n′ is an integer from 1 to 3;
  • A is R 6 O—, monosubstituted amino, or disubstituted amino
  • R 2 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl
  • R 3 is a structure selected from the group consisting of
  • R 4 is C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, C 3 -C 9 cycloalkenyl, limonenyl, pinenyl, C 1 -C 3 alkanoyl, optionally-substituted aryl, optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl(halo C 1 -C 4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl(alkoxy C 1 -C 4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl(C 2 -C 4 alkenyl), optionally-substituted aryl(halo C 2 -C 4 alkenyl), or optionally-substituted aryl(C 2 -C 4 alkynyl);
  • R 6 is selected from the group consisting of C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, (C 1 -C 4 alkoxy)-(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), a first heterocycle Y—, Y—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and R 7 R 8 N—(C 2 -C 4 alkyl);
  • R 6′ is selected from the group consisting of C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, (C 1 -C 4 alkoxy)-(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), Y′—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), where Y′— is a second heterocycle, and R 7 R 8 N—(C 2 -C 4 alkyl);
  • R 7 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl
  • R 8 is C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, optionally-substituted aryl, or optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl); or
  • R 7′ is hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl
  • R 8′ is C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 Bcycloalkyl, optionally-substituted aryl, or optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl); or
  • R 10 and R 11 are each independently chosen from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxycarbonyl, C 1 -C 5 alkanoyloxy, benzyloxy, benzoyloxy, diphenylmethoxy, triphenylmethoxy, optionally-substituted aryl, and optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl);
  • R 12 and R 12′ are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxycarbonyl, optionally-substituted aryloxycarbonyl, optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and optionally-substituted aryloyl; and
  • A is a monosubstituted amino having the formula XNH—, where X is selected from the group consisting of C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, (C 1 -C 4 alkoxy)-(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl, optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), the first heterocycle Y, Y—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), R 7 R 8 N—, and R 7 R 8 N—(C 2 -C 4 alkyl).
  • A is a disubstituted amino having the formula R 5 XN—; where R 5 is selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxycarbonyl, and benzyl; and where X is selected from the group consisting of C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, (C 1 -C 4 alkoxy)-(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl, optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), the first heterocycle Y, Y—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), R 7 R 8 N—, and R 7 R 8 N—(C 2 -C 4 alkyl).
  • A is a disubstituted amino having the formula R 5 XN—, where R 5 and X are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, and homopiperazinyl;
  • A is a disubstituted amino having the formula R 5 XN—, where R 5 and X are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinonyl, piperidinonyl, 2-(pyrrolidin-1-ylmethyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolin-2-yl.
  • A′ is a monosubstituted amino having the formula XNH—; where X′ is selected from the group consisting of C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, (C 1 -C 4 alkoxy)-(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl, optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), the second heterocycle Y′, Y′—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), R 7′ R 8′ N—, and R 7′ R 8′ N—(C 2 -C 4 alkyl).
  • A′ is a disubstituted amino having the formula R 5 XN—; where R 5′ is selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxycarbonyl, and benzyl; and X′ is selected from the group consisting of C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, (C 1 -C 4 alkoxy)-(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl, optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), the second heterocycle Y′, Y′—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), R 7′ R 8′ N—, and R 7′ R 8′ N—(C 2 -C 4 alkyl).
  • A′ is a disubstituted amino having the formula R 5′ XN—, where R 5′ and X′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, and homopiperazinyl;
  • A′ is a disubstituted amino having the formula R 5′ X′N—, where R 5′ and X′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinonyl, piperidinonyl, 2-(pyrrolidin-1-ylmethyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolin-2-yl.
  • R 4 is optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl(C 2 -C 4 alkenyl), or optionally-substituted aryl(C 2 -C 4 alkynyl).
  • A is a disubstituted amino having the formula R 5 XN—, where R 5 and X are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, and piperazinyl; where said heterocycle is optionally substituted with C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, R 7 R 8 N—, R 7 R 8 N—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), option ally-substituted aryl, or optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl).
  • A is a monosubstituted amino having the formula XNH—, where X is optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl).
  • R 4 is optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl(C 2 -C 4 alkenyl), or optionally-substituted aryl(C 2 -C 4 alkynyl);
  • R 3 is the structure
  • R 2 is hydrogen
  • A′ is a monosubstituted amino having the formula X′NH—, where X′ is optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), the second heterocycle Y′, Y′—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), R 7′ R 8′ N—, or R 7′ R 8′ N—(C 2 -C 4 alkyl).
  • X′ is the second heterocycle Y′ or Y′—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), where the second heterocycle Y′ is selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, and homopiperazinyl, where said second heterocycle is optionally N -substituted with optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl).
  • R 8′ is selected from the group consisting of C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, and aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl).
  • R 7′ and R 8′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, and homopiperazinyl, where said piperazinyl or homopiperazinyl is optionally substituted at the 4-position with (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), (C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl), or aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl).
  • R 5 is aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)
  • X′ is selected from the group consisting of optionally-substituted aryl(C(—C 4 alkyl), the second heterocycle Y′, Y′—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), R 7′ R 8′ N—, and R 7′ R 8′ N—(C 2 -C 4 alkyl).
  • R 8′ is selected from the group consisting of C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, and aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl).
  • R 7′ and R 8′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, and homopiperazinyl, where said piperazinyl or homopiperazinyl is optionally substituted at the 4-position with (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), (C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl), or aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl).
  • R 7′ and R 8′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, and homopiperazinyl, where said piperazinyl or homopiperazinyl is optionally substituted at the 4-position with (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), (C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl), or aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl).
  • the present invention also describes a pharmaceutical comprising a compound selected from those described above, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent, or excipient.
  • alkyl includes such groups as methyl, ethyl, n -propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec -butyl, tert -butyl, pentyl, 2-pentyl, 3-pentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl and the like.
  • cycloalkyl includes such groups as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, and the like.
  • alkenyl includes such groups as ethenyl, propenyl, 2-butenyl, and the like.
  • alkynyl includes such groups as ethynyl, propynyl, 1-butynyl, and the like.
  • aryl refers to an aromatic ring or heteroaromatic ring and includes such groups as furyl, pyrrolyl, thienyl, pyridinyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, phenyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, naphthyl, indanyl, fluorenyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzodioxanyl, benzofuranyl, benzothienyl, and the like.
  • substituents include such groups as C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, C 1 -C 4 alkylthio, hydroxy, nitro, halo, carboxy, cyano, C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 4 haloalkoxy, amino, carboxamido, amino, mono(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)amino, di(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)amino, C 1 -C 4 alkylsulfonylamino, and the like.
  • heterocycle refers to a saturated cyclic structure possessing one or more heteroatoms, such as nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, and the like, and includes such groups as tetrahydrofuryl, morpholinyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, homopiperazinyl, quinuclidinyl, and the like.
  • alkoxy includes such groups as methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, butoxy, tert -butoxy and the like.
  • acyl and “alkanoyl” include such groups as formyl, acetyl, propanoyl, butanoyl, pentanoyl and the like.
  • halo means fluoro, chloro, bromo, and iodo.
  • alkanoyloxy includes such groups as formyloxy, acetoxy, n-propionoxy, n-butyroxy, pivaloyloxy, and like lower alkanoyloxy groups.
  • optionally-substituted C 1 -C 4 alkyl and “optionally-substituted C 2 -C 4 alkenyl” are taken to mean an alkyl or alkenyl chain which is optionally substituted with up to two methyl groups or with a C 1 -C 4 alkoxycarbonyl group.
  • (C 1 -C 4 alkyl) refers to a saturated linear or branched divalent alkyl chain of from one to four carbons bearing for example aryl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, and the like, as a substituent and includes such groups as for example benzyl, phenethyl, phenpropyl, ⁇ -methylbenzyl, methoxymethyl, ethoxyethyl, and the like.
  • phenyl is taken to mean a phenyl radical optionally substituted with one or two substituents independently selected from the group consisting of C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, hydroxy, halo, nitro, trifluoromethyl, sulfonamido, cyano, carbamoyl, amino, mono(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)amino, di(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)amino, C 1 -C 4 alkylsulfonylamino, and indol-2-yl.
  • protected amino refers to amine protecting groups used to protect the nitrogen of the ⁇ -lactam, ring during preparation or subsequent reactions. Examples of such groups are benzyl, 4-methoxybenzyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, or trialkylsilyl, for example trimethylsilyl.
  • protected carboxy refers to the carboxy group protected or blocked by a conventional protecting group commonly used for the temporary blocking of the acidic carboxy.
  • groups include lower alkyl, for example tert -butyl, halo-substituted lower alkyl, for example 2-iodoethyl and 2,2,2-trichloroethyl, benzyl and substituted benzyl, for example 4-methoxybenzyl and 4-nitrobenzyl, diphenylmethyl, alkenyl, for example allyl, trialkylsilyl, for example trimethylsilyl and tert -butyldiethylsilyl and like carboxy-protecting groups.
  • antagonist is taken to mean a full or partial antagonist.
  • a compound which is a partial antagonist at the vasopressin V 1a receptor must exhibit sufficient antagonist activity to inhibit the effects of vasopressin or a vasopressin agonist at an acceptable dose. While a partial antagonist of any intrinsic activity may be useful, partial antagonists of at least about 50% antagonist effect are preferred and partial antagonists of at least about 80% antagonist effect are more preferred. Full antagonists of the vasopressin V 1a receptor are most preferred.
  • R 6 is C 1 -C 6 alkyl
  • R 6 is optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl);
  • A is a disubstituted amino having the formula R 5 XN—;
  • A′ is a monosubstituted amino having the formula X′NH—;
  • A′ is a disubstituted amino having the formula R 5′ XN—;
  • R 6′ is C 1 -C 6 alkyl
  • R 6′ is optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl);
  • (ak) X is optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl);
  • (al) X is R 7 R 8 N—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl);
  • the heterocycle is optionally substituted with an optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), the first heterocycle Y, or C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl;
  • R 2 is hydrogen
  • R 2 is C 1 -C 6 alkyl
  • R 2 is C 1 -C 2 alkyl
  • R 3 is 4-substituted oxazolidin-2-on-3-yl
  • R 3 is 4,5-disubstituted oxazolidin-2-on-3-yl
  • R 3 is 2-substituted oxazolidin-4-on-3-yl
  • R 3 is 2-substituted imidazolidin-4-on-3-yl
  • R 3 is 1,2-disubstituted imidazolidin-4-on-3-yl
  • R 3 is 5-substituted imidazolidin-2-on-1-yl
  • R 3 is 4,5-disubstituted imidazolidin-4-on-1-yl
  • R 4 is optionally-substituted 2-aryleth-1-yl
  • R 4 is optionally-substituted 2-arylethen-1-yl
  • R 5 is benzyl
  • X is optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl);
  • (be) aryl is optionally-substituted phenyl
  • X′ is R 7 R 8 N—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl);
  • R 7 is C 1 -C 6 alkyl
  • R 8 is C 1 -C 6 alkyl
  • R 7 and R 8 are the same and are C 1 -C 6 alkyl
  • R 5′ and X′ taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached form piperidinyl optionally substituted at the 4-position with hydroxy, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, (C 1 -C 4 alkoxy)carbonyl, (hydroxy(C 1 -C 4 alkyloxy))—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), R 7 R 8 N—, R 7 R 8 N—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), phenyl, phenyl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), optionally-substituted phenyl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), furyl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), pyridinyl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), thienyl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), or piperidin-1-yl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl),
  • R 5′ and X′ taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached form piperazinyl optionally substituted at the 4-position with C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, optionally-substituted phenyl, optionally-substituted phenyl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), N —(C 1 -C 5 alkyl)acetamid-2-yl, N —(C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl)acetamid-2-yl, R 7 R 8 N—, or (C 1 -C 4 alkoxy)carbonyl; and
  • R 5′ and X′ taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached form homopiperazinyl optionally substituted in the 4-position with C 1 -C 4 alkyl, phenyl, or phenyl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl).
  • classes of compounds described above may be combined to form additional illustrative classes.
  • An example of such a combination of classes may be a class of compounds wherein A is a monosubstituted amino having the formula XNH—, where X is optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and A′ is a disubstituted amino having the formula R 5′ X′N—, where R 5′ and X′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle, such as piperidine, peperazine, and the like. Further combinations of the classes of compounds described above are contemplated in the present invention.
  • Ar is optionally-substituted phenyl, optionally-substituted pyridinyl, optionally-substituted furyl, or optionally-substituted thienyl;
  • R 2 is hydrogen
  • A is XNH—
  • A′ is X′NH—
  • A′ is R 5′ XN—
  • n 0, 1, or 2;
  • X is optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and aryl is substituted phenyl;
  • A′ is R 6′ O—
  • R 6′ is C 1 -C 6 alkyl
  • X′ is R 7′ R 8′ N—
  • X′ is optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl);
  • X′ is the second heterocycle Y′
  • R 5′ and X′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form piperidinyl, piperazinyl, or homopiperazinyl; where said piperidinyl, piperazinyl, or homopiperazinyl is optionally substituted with C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, the second heterocycle Y′, optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), R 7 R 8 N—, R 7 R 8 N—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), or R 7 R 8 N—C(O)—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl);
  • R 8′ is C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, optionally-substituted aryl, optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl);
  • R 7′ and R 8′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, and piperazinyl; where said piperazinyl is optionally substituted at the 4-position with C 1 -C 4 alkyl.
  • Ar is optionally-substituted phenyl, optionally-substituted pyridinyl, optionally-substituted furyl, or optionally-substituted thienyl;
  • R 2 is hydrogen
  • A is XNH—
  • n′ is 1, 2, or 3;
  • X is optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and aryl is substituted phenyl;
  • R 8′ is C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, optionally-substituted aryl, optionally-substituted aryl(C 1 -C 4 alkyl);
  • R 7′ and R 8′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, and piperazinyl; where said piperazinyl is optionally substituted at the 4-position with C 1 -C 4 alkyl.
  • the compounds of the present invention are comprised of an azetidinone nucleus, said nucleus bearing asymmetric carbons at the 3- and 4-positions as illustrated by following structures:
  • the compounds of the invention may, therefore, exist as single diastereomers, mixtures of diastereomers, or as a racemic mixture, all of which are useful and part of the invention. It is preferred that the azetidinone nucleus of the compounds of the invention exist in a single diastereomeric form. It is most preferred that the azetidinone nucleus exist as the (3S,4R)-diastereomer.
  • the compounds of this invention are useful in methods for antagonism of the vasopressin V 1a receptor. Such antagonism is useful in treating a variety of disorders that have been linked to this receptor in mammals. It is preferred that the mammal to be treated by the administration of compounds of this invention is human.
  • the compounds of this invention are amines, they are basic in nature and accordingly react with any of a number of inorganic and organic acids to form pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts. Because some of the free amines of the compounds of this invention are typically oils at room temperature, it is preferable to convert the free amines to their pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts for ease of handling and administration, since the latter are routinely solid at room temperature.
  • Acids commonly employed to form such salts are inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, hydroiodic acid, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like, and organic acids, such as p -toluenesulfonic acid, methanesulfonic acid, oxalic acid, p -bromophenylsulfonic acid, carbonic acid, succinic acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, acetic acid, and the like.
  • inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, hydroiodic acid, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like
  • organic acids such as p -toluenesulfonic acid, methanesulfonic acid, oxalic acid, p -bromophenylsulfonic acid, carbonic acid, succinic acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, acetic acid, and the like.
  • Examples of such pharmaceutically acceptable salts thus are the sulfate, pyrosulfate, bisulfate, sulfite, bisulfite, phosphate, monohydrogenphosphate, dihydrogenphosphate, metaphosphate, pyrophosphate, chloride, bromide, iodide, acetate, propionate, decanoate, caprylate, acrylate, formate, isobutyrate, caproate, heptanoate, propiolate, oxalate, malonate, succinate, suberate, sebacate, fumarate, maleate, butyne-1,4-dioate, hexyne-1,6-dioate, benzoate, chlorobenzoate, methylbenzoate, dinitrobenzoate, hydroxybenzoate, methoxybenzoate, phthalate, sulfonate, xylenesulfonate, phenylacetate, phenylpropionate, phen
  • the 2-(azetidinon-1-yl)alkanedioic acid esters and amides of formulae I and II are prepared by syntheses well known in the art. As illustrated for compounds of formula I, the 2-(azetidinon-1-yl)alkanedioic acid esters are obtainable by the 2+2 cycloaddition of an appropriately substituted acetic acid derivative (i), and an imine ester (ii) as described in Synthetic Scheme I, where Z is a leaving group, and the integer n, and the moieties A, A′, R 2 , R 3 , and R 4 are as previously described.
  • leaving group refers to a substitutent, such as halo, acyloxy, benzoyloxy and the like, present on an activated carbon atom that may be replaced by a nucleophile.
  • the chemistry described in Synthetic Scheme I is applicable to imines (ii) bearing ester, thioester, or amide moieties.
  • the preparation of the appropriate imines (ii) and most of the required acetyl halides or anhydrides (i), as well as the cycloaddition procedure, are generally described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,665,171 and 4,751,299, hereby incorporated by reference.
  • the analogous synthesis of compounds of formula II may be accomplished by this process using the appropriate alkoxy-substituted amino acid imines.
  • Those compounds of formulae I and II of the invention requiring R 3 to be 4-substituted oxazolidin-2-on-3-yl or 1,4,5-trisubstituted imidazolidin-2-on-3-yl are prepared from the corresponding (4-substituted oxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)- or (1,4,5-trisubstituted imidazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-acetyl halide or anhydride.
  • the acid halide or anhydride is available from an appropriately substituted glycine.
  • the glycine is first converted to the carbamate and then reduced to provide the corresponding alcohol.
  • the alcohol is then cyclized to the 4-substituted oxazolidin-2-one, which is subsequently N-alkylated with a haloacetic acid ester.
  • the ester is hydrolyzed, and the resulting acid is converted to the acetyl halide or anhydride (i).
  • the required oxazolidinone or imidazolidinone is obtained from an x-hydroxyacid or an ⁇ -aminoacid, respectively.
  • the imidazolones are prepared by converting the ⁇ -aminoacid, (R 11 )—CH(NH 2 )CO 2 H, to an amino-protected amide and then condensing the amide with an aldehyde, (R 10 )—CHO, in the presence of an acid to form the 3-protected imidazolidin-4-one, where R 10 and R 11 are as defined above.
  • the 1-position may be functionalized with an appropriate reagent to introduce R 12 and the 3-position deprotected, where R 12 is as defined above.
  • the imidazolidin-4-one ring is then alkylated with a haloacetic acid ester, the ester deesterified, and the resulting acetic acid converted to the desired acid halide or anhydride (i).
  • the required oxazolidinones are prepared in an analogous manner from the corresponding ⁇ -hydroxyacid, (R 11 )—CH(OH)CO 2 H.
  • Tartaric acid is acylated or O -alkylated, the corresponding diacyl or di- O -alkyl tartaric acid is treated with an acid anhydride to form the succinic anhydride, and reaction of this succinic anhydride with an ester of glycine to form first the noncyclic half amide ester which is then cyclized to the 3,4-disubstituted succinimidoacetic acid ester.
  • the ester group is deesterified and the resulting acid converted to the corresponding acid halide or anhydride (i).
  • the mono-substituted succinimidoacetyl halide or anhydride is obtained with malic acid V 1a succinic anhydride formation followed by succinimide formation as described above.
  • Those compounds of the invention requiring R 3 to be an N -substituted amine or an N ′-substituted urea may be prepared from the corresponding phthalimido protected 3-amino analogs.
  • the phthalimide protecting group may be removed using conventional procedures, such as by treatment with hydrazine, and the like.
  • the amine may be alkylated with any one of a variety of alkyl and cycloalkyl halides and sulfates, such as methyl iodide, isopropylbromide, diethyl sulfate, cyclopropylmethylbromide, cyclopentyliodide, and the like.
  • Such amines may also be acylated with acid halides, acid anhydrides, isocyanates, isothiocyanates, such as acetyl chloride, propionic anhydride, methylisocyanate, 3-trifluoromethylphenylisothiocyanate, and the like.
  • the bases to be used in Synthetic Scheme I include, among others, aliphatic tertiary amines, such as trimethylamine and triethylamine, cyclic tertiary amines, such as N-methylpiperidine and N-methylmorpholine, aromatic amines, such as pyridine and lutidine, and other organic bases such as 1,8-diazabicyclo[5,4,0]undec-7-ene (DBU).
  • aliphatic tertiary amines such as trimethylamine and triethylamine
  • cyclic tertiary amines such as N-methylpiperidine and N-methylmorpholine
  • aromatic amines such as pyridine and lutidine
  • other organic bases such as 1,8-diazabicyclo[5,4,0]undec-7-ene (DBU).
  • the solvents useful for reactions described in Synthetic Scheme I include, among others, dioxane, tetrahydrofuran, diethyl ether, ethyl acetate, dichloromethane, chloroform, carbon tetrachloride, benzene, toluene, acetonitrile, dimethyl sulfoxide and N , N -dimethylformamide.
  • the compounds of formulae I and II may be prepared V 1a N —C(4) cyclization, as illustrated for compounds of formula I in Synthetic Scheme II, via cyclization of ⁇ -hydroxy amides iii, where R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , A, and A′ are as defined previously, according to the procedure of Townsend and Nguyen in J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1981, 103, 4582, and Miller and Mattingly in Tetra. 1983, 39, 2563, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the analogous synthesis of compounds of formula II may be accomplished by cyclization of ⁇ -hydroxy amides of alkoxy-substituted amino acids.
  • the azetidinone ring may also be prepared with a deficit of substituents R 3 , R 4 , or the R 2 -substituted N -alkanedioic acid or alkoxyalkanoic acid moiety, but possessing substituents capable of being elaborated through subsequent chemical transformation to such groups described for compounds of formulae I and II.
  • azetidinones may be prepared V 1a N —C(4) cyclization, such as the cyclization of acylhydroxamates iv to azetidinone intermediates v, as depicted in Scheme III, where R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , A, and A′ are as defined above, according to the procedure of Mattingly et al. in J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1979, 101, 3983 and Accts. Chem. Res. 1986, 19, 49, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. It is appreciated that other hydroxamates, such as alkylhydroxamates, aryl hydroxamates, and the like, are suitable for carrying out the cyclization.
  • R may be the group PhCH 2 —, as in vii-a, such that oxidative elimination of HBr will provide the desired R 4 , a styryl group, as in vii-b. It is appreciated that elaboration of R to R 4 is not necessarily performed immediately subsequent to the cyclization and may be performed conveniently after other steps in the synthesis of compounds of formulae I and II. It is further appreciated that alternatives to the acylhydroxamates shown, such as alkylhydroxamates, aryl hydroxamates, and the like, are suitable for carrying out the cyclization.
  • Synthetic Scheme V illustrates the corresponding Wittig olefination with phosphorane ix.
  • the analogous synthesis of compounds of formula II may be accomplished by this process using an appropriate alkoxy-substituted azetidinone-4-carboxaldehyde derivative.
  • Still other useful intermediates such as the azetidinonyl acetic acid derivatives x, may be converted into compounds of formulae I and II, as illustrated for the synthesis of compounds of formula I in Synthetic Scheme VI.
  • Introduction of an R 2 moiety, and a carboxylic acid derivative A′-C(O)—(CH 2 ) n — for compounds of formula I, or an alkoxyalkanoic acid derivative R 6′ —(CH 2 ) n — for compounds of formula II, may be accomplished by alkylation of the anion of x, where the integers n and n′, and the groups R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 6 , A, and A′ are as defined above.
  • Acetic acid derivative x is deprotonated and subsequently alkylated with an alkyl halide corresponding to R 2 -Z, where Z is a leaving group, to provide intermediate xi.
  • the anion of xi may be alkylated with a compound Z′-(CH 2 ) n COA′, where Z′ is a leaving group, to provide compounds of formula I.
  • the order of introduction of either the substituent R 2 or the acid derivative —(CH 2 ) n COA′, or the alkoxyalkanoic acid derivative —(CH 2 ) n′ OR 6′ is conveniently chosen by the skilled artisan and such order of introduction may be different for each compound of formula I or formula II.
  • Suitable bases for this transformation include lithium diisopropylamide, lithium 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidinamide, or lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide.
  • the anion is then quenched with an appropriate electrophile to provide the desired compounds.
  • Illustrative electrophiles represented by the formulae R 2 -Z, R 5 XN—C(O)—(CH 2 ) n -Z, or R 6′ O—C(O)—(CH 2 ) n -Z provide the corresponding compounds xi or I, respectively.
  • the analogous synthesis of compounds of formula II may be accomplished by this process by using an electrophile represented by the formula R 6′ O—(CH 2 ) n -Z.
  • the compounds prepared as described in Synthetic Schemes I, II, IV, I, V, and VI may be pure diastereomers, mixtures of diastereomers, or racemates.
  • the actual stereochemical composition of the compound will be dictated by the specific reaction conditions, combination of substituents, and stereochemistry of the reactants employed. It is appreciated that diasteromeric mixtures may be separated by chromatography or fractional crystallization to provide single diastereomers if desired.
  • the requisite carboxylic acid xii may be prepared from the corresponding ester V 1a saponification under standard conditions by treatment with hydroxide followed by protonation of the resultant carboxylate anion.
  • R 6′ is tert-butyl
  • the ester I-a may be dealkylated by treatment with trifluoroacetic acid.
  • R 6′ is benzyl
  • the ester I-a may be dealkylated either by subjection to mild hydrogenolysis conditions, or by reaction with elemental sodium or lithium in liquid ammonia.
  • ester I-a may be deprotected and converted into the corresponding acid xii by treatment with a source of fluoride ion, such as tetrabutylammonium fluoride.
  • a source of fluoride ion such as tetrabutylammonium fluoride.
  • the carboxylic acid xii is converted to the corresponding amide I-b under standard conditions well recognized in the art.
  • the acid may be first converted to the corresponding acid halide, preferably the chloride or fluoride, followed by treatment with an appropriate primary or secondary amine to provide the corresponding amide.
  • the acid may be converted under standard conditions to a mixed anhydride. This is typically accomplished by first treating the carboxylic acid with an amine, such as triethylamine, to provide the corresponding carboxylate anion. This carboxylate is then reacted with a suitable haloformate, for example benzyl chloroformate, ethyl chloroformate or isobutylchloroformate, to provide the corresponding mixed anhydride.
  • a suitable haloformate for example benzyl chloroformate, ethyl chloroformate or isobutylchloroformate
  • This anhydride may then be treated with an appropriate primary or secondary amine to provide the desired amide.
  • the carboxylic acid may be treated with a typical peptide coupling reagent such as N , N ′-carbonyldiimidazole (CDI), N , N ′-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC) and 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (EDC), followed by the appropriate amine of formula R 5 XNH.
  • CDI N ′-carbonyldiimidazole
  • DCC N ′-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide
  • EDC 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride
  • the carboxylic acid may alternatively be converted into the corresponding tert-butyl ester V 1a treatment of the acid with an acid catalyst, such as concentrated sulfuric acid, and the like, and with isobutylene in a suitable solvent, such as dioxane, and the like.
  • the reaction is preferably carried out under pressure in an appropriate vessel, such as a pressure bottle, and the like. Reaction times of about 18 hours are not uncommon.
  • the desired ester may be isolated from the organic layer after partitioning the reaction mixture between a suitable organic solvent, such as ethyl acetate, and the like, and a basic aqueous layer, such as cold 1N sodium hydroxide, and the like.
  • R 4 includes an ethenyl or ethynyl spacer
  • compounds I-c and I-d may be converted into the corresponding arylethyl derivatives, compounds I-e, V 1a reduction, as illustrated for compounds of formula I in Synthetic Scheme VIII. Conversion is accomplished by catalytic hydrogenation, and other like reductions, where the integer n and the groups R 2 , R 3 , A, and A′ are as previously defined.
  • the corresponding compounds of formula II may also be converted from ethylene and ethene precursors in an analogous fashion.
  • the moiety R depicted in Scheme VIII is chosen such that the substituent R—CC—, R—CHCH—, or R—CH 2 CH 2 — corresponds to the desired R 4 of formulae I or II as defined above.
  • the hydrogenation of the triple or double bond proceeds readily over a precious metal catalyst, such as palladium on carbon.
  • the hydrogenation solvent may consist of a lower alkanol, such as methanol or ethanol, tetrahydrofuran, or a mixed solvent system of tetrahydrofuran and ethyl acetate.
  • the hydrogenation may be performed at an initial hydrogen pressure of about 20-80 p.s.i., preferably about 50-60 p.s.i., at a temperature of about 0-60° C., preferably within the range of from ambient temperature to about 40° C., for about 1 hour to about 3 days.
  • the ethynyl spacer of compound I-c may be selectively reduced to the ethenyl spacer of compound I-d using poisoned catalyst, such as Pd on BaSO 4 , Lindlar's catalyst, and the like. It is appreciated that either the Z or E double bond geometry of compound I-d may be advantageously obtained by the appropriate choice of reaction conditions.
  • poisoned catalyst such as Pd on BaSO 4 , Lindlar's catalyst, and the like.
  • This compound may then be treated with an appropriate alkylating or acylating agent to prepare the corresponding amines or amides I-g, or alternatively intermediates xiii may be treated with an appropriate isocyanate to prepare the corresponding ureas I-h.
  • the ureas I-h are prepared by treating a solution of the appropriate amine xiii in a suitable solvent, such as chloroform or dichloromethane, with an appropriate isocyanate, R 12 NCO. If necessary, an excess of the isocyanate is employed to ensure complete reaction of the starting amine. The reactions are performed at about ambient temperature to about 45° C., for from about three hours to about three days. Typically, the product may be isolated by washing the reaction with Water and concentrating the remaining organic components under reduced pressure. When an excess of isocyanate has been used, however, a polymer bound primary or secondary amine, such as an aminomethylated polystyrene, may be conveniently added to facilitate removal of the excess reagent. Isolation of products from reactions where a polymer bound reagent has been used is greatly simplified, requiring only filtration of the reaction mixture and then concentration of the filtrate under reduced pressure.
  • a suitable solvent such as chloroform or dichloromethane
  • the substituted amines and amides I-g are prepared by treating a solution of the appropriate amine xiii in a suitable solvent, such as chloroform or dichloromethane, with an appropriate acylating or alkylating agent, R 12 —C(O)Z or R 12 -Z, respectively. If necessary, an excess of the acylating or alkylating agent is employed to ensure complete reaction of the starting amine.
  • the reactions are performed at about ambient temperature to about 45° C., for from about three hours to about three days.
  • the product may be isolated by washing the reaction with water and concentrating the remaining organic components under reduced pressure.
  • a polymer bound primary or secondary amine such as an aminomethylated polystyrene
  • Isolation of products from reactions where a polymer bound reagent has been used is greatly simplified, requiring only filtration of the reaction mixture and then concentration of the filtrate under reduced pressure.
  • the analogous synthesis of compounds of formula II may be accomplished by this process.
  • Examples 3-5 were prepared according to the procedure of Example 2, except that N -benzyloxycarbonyl-L-aspartic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester ⁇ - N -hydroxysuccinimide ester was replaced by the appropriate amino acid derivative, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine.
  • reaction mixture was washed sequentially with a saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution and with distilled water.
  • Examples 7 and 7A-7E were prepared according to the procedure of Example 6, except that N -benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced by the appropriate amino acid derivative, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine.
  • Example 7A N -benzyloxycarbonyl-L-glutamic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester (1.36 g, 4.03 mmol) and 0.746 g (4.43 mmol) of 1-cyclohexylpiperazine gave 1.93 g (98%) of Example 7A as an off-white solid; 1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) ⁇ 1.02-1.12 (m, 5H); 1.43 (s, 9H), 1.60-1.64 (m, 1H); 1.80-1.93 (m, 5H); 2.18-1.52 (m, 8H); 3.38-3.60 (m, 4H); 4.20-4.24 (m, 1H); 5.03-5.13 (m, 2H); 5.53-5.57 (m, 1H); 7.28-7.34 (m, 5H).
  • N -benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester (0.303 g, 0.89 mmol, Novabiochem) and 0.168 g (0.89 mmol) of N -methyl- N -(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amine gave 0.287 g (65%) of Example 7E as an off-white solid;
  • Examples 9-13 and 13A-13E were prepared according to the procedure of Example 8, except that N -benzyloxycarbonyl-L-aspartic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester ⁇ -(3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide was replaced by the appropriate amino acid derivative.
  • Step 1 General Procedure for Formation of an Imine from an Amino Acid Derivative.
  • a solution of 1 equivalent of an ⁇ -amino acid ester or amide in dichloromethane is treated sequentially with 1 equivalent of an appropriate aldehyde, and a dessicating agent, such as magnesium sulfate or silica gel, in the amount of about 2 grams of dessicating agent per gram of starting ⁇ -amino acid ester or amide.
  • a dessicating agent such as magnesium sulfate or silica gel
  • Step 2 General Procedure for the 2+2 Cycloaddition of an Imine and an Acetyl Chloride.
  • a dichloromethane solution of the imine (10 mL dichloromethane/1 gram imine) is cooled to 0° C.
  • an appropriate amine typically triethylamine
  • a dichloromethane solution of 1.1 equivalents of an appropriate acetyl chloride such as that described in Example 1 (10 mL dichloromethane/1 gm appropriate acetyl chloride).
  • the reaction mixture is allowed to warm to ambient temperature over 1 h and is then quenched by the addition of a saturated aqueous solution of ammonium chloride.
  • the resulting mixture is partitioned between water and dichloromethane.
  • the layers are separated and the organic layer is washed successively with 1N hydrochloric acid, saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate, and saturated aqueous sodium chloride.
  • the organic layer is dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue may be used directly for further reactions, or purified by chromatography or by crystallization from an appropriate solvent system if desired.
  • Example 14 Using the procedure of Example 14, the imine prepared from 4.53 g (34.5 mmol) glycine tert-butyl ester and cinnamaldehyde was combined with 2-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl) acetyl chloride (Example 1) to give 5.5 g (30%) of Example 15 as colorless crystals (recrystallized, n-chlorobutane); mp 194-195° C.
  • Example 15 Using the procedure of Example 16, 9.0 g (20 mmol) of Example 15 was acylated with 4.2 g (20 mmol) of trichloroethylchloroformate to give 7.0 g (56%) of Example 17; mp 176-178° C.
  • Example 18 A solution of 0.20 g (0.32 mmol) of Example 17 and 52 ⁇ L (0.36 mmol) of (3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amine in THF was heated at reflux. Upon complete conversion (TLC), the solvent was evaporated and the residue was recrystallized (chloroform/hexane) to give 0.17 g (82%) of Example 18 as a white solid; mp 182-184° C.
  • Examples 19-25 and 25A-25H were prepared according to the procedure of Example 14, where the appropriate amino acid derivative and aldehyde were used in Step 1, and the appropriate acetyl chloride was used in Step 2.
  • Example 1 The imine prepared from 2.54 g (6.75 mmol) of L-glutamic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester ⁇ -[4-(2-phenylethyl)]piperazinamide and cinnamaldehyde was combined with 2-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)acetyl chloride (Example 1) to give 3.55 g (76%) of Example 22 after flash column chromatography purification (50:50 hexanes/ethyl acetate); 1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) ⁇ 1.32 (s, 9H); 1.96-2.07 (m, 1H); 2.15-2.44 (m, 6H); 2.54-2.62 (m, 2H); 2.69-2.81 (m, 3H); 3.28-3.34 (m, 1H); 3.59-3.68 (m, 1H); 4.08-4.13 (m, 1H); 4.33-4.44 (m, 2H); 4.48-4.60 (m,
  • Example 1 The imine prepared from 2.58 g (5.94 mmol) of L-glutamic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester ⁇ -(4-cyclohexyl)piperazinamide and cinnamaldehyde was combined with 2-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)acetyl chloride (Example 1) to give 3.27 g (94%) of Example 25 after flash column chromatography purification (95:5 dichloromethane/methanol); 1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) ⁇ 1.32 (s, 9H); 1.10-1.18 (m, 1H); 1.20-1.31 (m, 2H); 1.38-1.45 (m, 2H); 1.61-1.66 (m, 1H); 1.84-1.89 (m, 2H); 1.95-2.01 (m, 1H); 2.04-2.14 (m, 3H); 2.20-2.24 (m, 1H); 2.29-2.35 (m, 1H); 2.85-2.92
  • Example 1 The imine prepared from 1.282 g (3.63 mmol) of L-glutamic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester ⁇ -(4-cyclohexyl)piperazinamide and cinnamaldehyde was combined with 2-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)acetyl chloride (Example 1) to give 1.946 g (80%) of Example 25A after flash column chromatography purification (50:50 hexanes/ethyl acetate); 1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) ⁇ 1.15-1.26 (m, 6H); 1.39 (s, 9H); 1.55-1.64 (m, 2H); 1.77-1.83 (m, 3H); 2.22-2.35 (m, 2H); 2.40-2.50 (m, 6H); 2.75-2.79 (m, 1H); 3.43-3.48 (m, 1H); 3.56-3.60 (m, 2H); 3.75-3.79 (m,
  • a solution of tert-butyl ester derivative in formic acid is stirred at ambient temperature until no more ester is detected by thin layer chromatography (dichloromethane 95%/methanol 5%), a typical reaction time being around 3 hours.
  • the formic acid is evaporated under reduced pressure; the resulting solid residue is partitioned between dichloromethane and saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate. The organic layer is evaporated to give an off-white solid that may be used directly for further reactions, or recrystallized from an appropriate solvent system if desired.
  • Examples 27-34 and 34A-34H were prepared from the appropriate tert-butyl ester according to the procedure used in Example 26.
  • Example 18 (0.30 g, 0.46 mmol) was hydrolyzed to give 0.27 g (quantitative yield) of Example 27 as an off-white solid; 1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) ⁇ 4.17-5.28 (m, 9H); 6.21-6.29 (m, 1H), 6.68-6.82 (m, 1H); 7.05-7.75 (m, 13H); 9.12-9.18 (m, 1H).
  • Example 23 (1.51 g, 2.27 mmol) was hydrolyzed to give 1.38 g (quantitative yield) of Example 32 as an off-white solid.
  • Example 24 (0.604 g, 0.89 mmol) was hydrolyzed to give 0.554 g (quantitative yield) of Example 33 as an off-white solid.
  • Examples 36-42 and 42A shown in Table 6, were prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N -benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 27, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine; all listed Examples exhibited an 1 H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
  • Examples 43-86 and 86A shown in Table 7, were prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N -benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 28, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine; all listed Examples exhibited an 1 H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
  • Examples 87-120 and 120A-120D shown in Table 8, Were prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N -benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 29, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine; all listed Examples exhibited an 1 H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
  • Examples 121-132 shown in Table 9, were prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N -benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 30, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine; all listed Examples exhibited an 1 H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
  • Examples 133-134 and 134A-134F shown in Table 10, were prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N -benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 32, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine; all listed Examples exhibited an 1 H NMR assigned structure.
  • Examples 135-140 shown in Table 11, were prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N -benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 33, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine; all listed Examples exhibited an 1 H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
  • Examples 141-171 shown in Table 12, were prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N -benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 34, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine; all listed Examples exhibited an 1 H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
  • Examples 172-221 shown in Table 13, were prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N -benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 34A, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine; all listed Examples exhibited an 1 H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
  • Example 222 was prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N -benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 34B, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with 4-(piperidin-1-yl)piperidine; Example 222 exhibited an 1 H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
  • Example 223 was prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N -benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 34C, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with 4-(piperidin-1-yl)piperidine; Example 223 exhibited an 1 H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
  • Example 224 was prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N -benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 34D, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with 4-(piperidin-1-yl)piperidine; Example 223 exhibited an 1 H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
  • Example 225 was prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N -benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid ⁇ -1-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 34E, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with 4-(piperidin-1-yl)piperidine; Example 223 exhibited an 1 H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
  • Examples 226-230 shown in Table 14, were prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N -benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 34F, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine; all listed Examples exhibited an 1 H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
  • Example A′ 226 4-cyclhexylpiperazin-1-yl 227 4-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)piperazin-1-yl 228 4-ethylpiperazin-1-yl 229 4-n-butylpiperazin-1-yl 230 4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl
  • Example 231 was prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N -benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 34G, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with 4-(piperidin-1-yl)piperidine; Example 231 exhibited an 1 H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
  • Examples 232-233 shown in Table 15, were prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N -benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 34H, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine; all listed Examples exhibited an 1 H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
  • TABLE 15 Example A′ 232 4-(piperidin-1-yl)piperidin-1-yl 233 4-[2-(piperidin-1-yl)ethyl]piperidin-1-yl
  • Example 235 was prepared using the procedure of Example 8, except that N -benzyloxycarbonyl-L-aspartic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester ⁇ -(3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide was replaced with Example 63 (50 mg, 0.064 mmol) to give 40 mg (80%) of Example 235 as an off-white solid; Example 235 exhibited an 1 H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
  • Example 236 was prepared using the procedure of Example 8, except that N -benzyloxycarbonyl-L-aspartic acid ⁇ -t-butyl ester ⁇ -(3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide was replaced with Example 110 (50 mg, 0.065 mmol) to give 42 mg (84%) of Example 236 as an off-white solid; Example 236 exhibited an 1 H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
  • Table 16 illustrates compounds further characterized by mass spectral analysis using FAB + to observe the corresponding (M+H) + parent ion.
  • hV 1a cell line expressing the human V 1a receptor in CHO cells (henceforth referred to as the hV 1a cell line) was obtained from Dr. Michael Brownstein, NIMH, Bethesda, Md., USA.
  • the hV 1a cDNA sequence is described by Thibonnier et al., Journal of Biological Chemistry, 269, 3304-3310 (1994), and the expression method was the same as described by Morel et al. (1992).
  • the hV 1a cell line was grown in alpha-MEM with 10% fetal bovine serum and 250 ug/ml G418 (Gibco, Grand Island, N.Y., USA).
  • DMSO total binding
  • 5 concentrations 0.1, 1.0, 10, 100, and 1000 nM
  • vasopressin V 1a receptor is coupled to the G q /G 11 family of G proteins and mediates phosphatidylinositol turnover.
  • the agonist or antagonist character of the compounds of the invention may be determined by their ability to inhibit vasopressin-mediated turnover of phosphatidylinositol by the procedure described in the following paragraphs. Representative compounds of the indention, the compounds of Examples 35, 44, 88, 110, and 133, were tested in this assay and found to be vasopressin V 1a antagonists.
  • hV1a cells Three days prior to the assay, near-confluent cultures of hV1a cells were dissociated and seeded in 6-well tissue culture plates, about 100 wells being seeded from each 75 cm 2 flask (equivalent to 12:1 split ratio). Each well contained 1 mL of growth medium with 2 ⁇ Ci of [ 3 H]myo-inositol (American Radiolabeled Chemicals, St. Louis, Mo., USA).
  • AVP (arginine vasopressin), Peninsula Labs, Belmont, Calif., USA (#8103)) was dissolved in 0.1N acetic acid. Test agents were dissolved in DMSO and diluted in DMSO to 200 times the final test concentration.
  • Test agents and AVP were added separately as 5 ⁇ L in DMSO to 12 ⁇ 75 nm glass tubes containing 1 mL of assay buffer (Tyrode's balanced salt solution containing 50 mM glucose, 10 mM LiCl, 15 mM HEPES pH 7.4, 10 ⁇ M phosphoramidon, and 100 ⁇ M bacitracin).
  • assay buffer Tetrachloroacetic acid
  • the order of incubations was randomized. Incubations were initiated by removing the prelabeling medium, washing the monolayer once with 1 mL of 0.9% NaCl, and transferring the contents of the assay tubes to corresponding wells. The plates were incubated for 1 hour at 37° C. Incubations were terminated by removing the incubation medium and adding 500 ⁇ L of ice cold 5% (w/v) trichloroacetic acid and allowing the wells to stand for 15 min.
  • BioRad Poly-Prep Econo-Columns were packed with 0.3 mL of AG 1 X-8 100-200 formate form resin. Resin was mixed 1:1 with water and 0.6 mL added to each column. Columns were then washed with 10 mL water. Scintillation vials (20 mL) were placed under each column. For each well, the contents were transferred to a minicolumn, after which the well was washed with 0.5 mL distilled water, which was also added to the minicolumn. The columns were then washed twice with 5 mL of 5 mM myo-inositol to elute free inositol.
  • a high salt capacity scintillation fluid such as Tru-Count High Salt Capacity or Packard Hionic-Pluor.
  • Inositol lipids were measured by adding 1 mL of 2% sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS) to each well, allowing the wells to stand for at least 30 min., and transferring the solution to 20 mL scintillation vials, to which 10 mL Beckman Ready Protein Plus scintillation fluid was then added. Samples were counted in a Beckman LS 3801 liquid scintillation counter for 10 min. Total inositol incorporation for each well was calculated as the sum of free inositol, inositol phosphates, and inositol lipids.
  • Concentration-response curves for AVP and concentration-inhibition curves for test agents versus 10 nM AVP were analyzed by nonlinear least-squares curve-fitting to a 4-parameter logistic function. Parameters for basal and maximal inositol phosphates, EC 50 or IC 50 , and Hill coefficient were varied to achieve the best fit. The curve-fitting was weighted under the assumption that the standard deviation was proportional to dpm of radioactivity. Full concentration-response curves for AVP were run in each experiment, and IC 50 values were converted to K; values by application of the Cheng-Prusoff equation, based on the EC 50 for AVP in the same experiment. Inositol phosphates were expressed as dpm per 106 dpm of total inositol incorporation.
  • Vasopressin V 1a receptors are also known to mediate platelet aggregation Vasopressin V 1a receptor agonists cause platelet aggregation, while vasopressin V 1a receptor antagonists inhibit the platelet aggregation precipitated by vasopressin or vasopressin V 1a agonists.
  • the degree of antagonist activity of the compounds of the invention may be determined by the assay described in the following paragraphs.
  • Plasma samples Blood from healthy, human volunteers was collected by venipuncture and mixed with heparin (60 mL of blood added to 0.4 mL of heparanized saline solution (4 mg heparin/mL saline)).
  • Platelet-rich plasma (PRP) was prepared by centrifuging whole blood (150 ⁇ g), and indomethacin (3 ⁇ M) was added to PRP to block the thromboxane-mediated release reaction. PRP was continuously stirred at 37° C. and change in optical density was followed after the addition of arginine vasopressin (AVP) (30 nM) to initiate aggregation.
  • AVP arginine vasopressin
  • Compounds were dissolved in 50% dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) and added (10 ⁇ L/415 ⁇ L PRP) before the addition of AVP. The percent inhibition of AVP-induced aggregation was measured and an IC 50 calculated.
  • the activity of compounds of formula I in the antagonism of the vasopressin V 1a receptor provides a method of antagonizing the vasopressin V 1a receptor comprising administering to a subject in need of such treatment an effective amount of a compound of that formula. It is known that numerous physiological and therapeutic benefits are obtained through the administration of drugs that antagonize the vasopressin V 1a receptor. These activities may be catagorized as peripheral and central. Peripheral utilities include administration of vasopressin V 1a antagonists of formula I as adjuncts in heart failure or as antithrombotic agents. Central effects include administration of vasopressin V 1a antagonists of formula I in the treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorder, aggressive disorders, depression and anxiety.
  • Obsessive-compulsive disease appears in a great variety of degrees and symptoms, generally linked by the victim's uncontrollable urge to perform heedless, ritualistic acts. Acts of acquiring, ordering, cleansing and the like, beyond any rational need or rationale, are the outward characteristic of the disease. A badly afflicted subject may be unable to do anything but carry out the rituals required by the disease. Obsessive-compulsive disease, in all its variations, is a preferred target of treatment with the present adjunctive therapy method and compositions. The utility of the compounds of Formula I in the treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorder was demonstrated as described in the following assay.
  • flank marking behavior In golden hamsters, a particular stereotypy, flank marking behavior, can be induced by microinjections of vasopressin (10-100 mL, 1-100 ⁇ M) into the anterior hypothalamus (Ferris et al., Science, 224, 521-523 (1984); Albers and Ferris, Regulatory Peptides, 12, 257-260 (1985); Ferris et al., European Journal of Pharmacology, 154, 153-159 (1988)). Following the releasing stimulus, the behavior is initiated by grooming, licking and combing of the large sebaceous glands on the dorsolateral flanks. Bouts of flank gland grooming may be so intense that the flank region is left matted and soaked in saliva.
  • flank marking behavior a type of scent marking involved in olfactory communication (Johnston, Physio. Behav., 51, 437-448 (1985); Ferris et al., Physio. Behav., 40, 661-664 (1987)), by arching the back and rubbing the flank glands vigorously against any vertical surface.
  • Vasopressin-induced flank marking is usually induced within a minute after the microinjection (Ferris et al., Science, 224, 521-523 (1984)).
  • vasopressin As micro-injections of other neuropeptides, excitatory amino acids, and catecholamines do not elicit flank marking (Ferris et al., Science, 224, 521-523 (1984); Albers and Ferris, Regulatory Peptides, 12, 257-260 (1985)).
  • flank marking is specific to the vasopressin V 1 receptor, as the behavior is selectively inhibited by V 1 receptor antagonists and activated by V 1 receptor agonists (Ferris et al., Neuroscience Letters, 55, 239-243 (1985); Albers et al., Journal of Neuroscience, 6, 2085-2089 (1986); Ferris et al., European Journal of Pharmacology, 154, 153-159 (1988)).
  • Stereotaxic surgery was performed under pentobarbital anesthesia.
  • the stereotaxic coordinates were: 1.1 mm anterior to the bregma, 1.8 mm lateral to the midsagittal suture at an 8° angle from the vertical line, and 4.5 nm n below the dura.
  • the nose bar was placed at the level of the interaural line.
  • An unilateral 26-gauge guide cannula was lowered to the site and secured to the skull with dental cement.
  • the guide cannulae were closed with a 33-gauge obturator extending 1 mm beyond the guide.
  • the innercanulae used for the microinjections extended 3.0 mm beyond the guide to reach the anterior hypothalamus.
  • the hamsters were microinjected with 1 ⁇ M vasopressin in a volume of 150 nL.
  • the vasopressin was given as a cocktail with 200 mM, 20 mM, 2 mM of the test compound or alone, in the vehicle, dimethylsulfoxide. Both the vasopressin and the test compound were dissolved in 100% dimethylsulfoxide. All injections were aimed at the anterior hypothalamus. Animals were scored for flank marking for a period of 10 minutes in a clean cage.
  • Another aspect of this invention is the use of compounds of formula I in combination with a serotonin reuptake inhibitor for use in the treatment of obsessive-compulsive disease, aggressive disorder, or depression.
  • Compounds useful as serotonin reuptake inhibitors include but are not limited to:
  • Fluoxetine N -methyl-3-(pt-trifluoromethylphenoxy)-3-phenylpropylamine, is marketed in the hydrochloride salt form, and as the racemic mixture of its two enantiomers.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 4,314,081 is an early reference on the compound. Robertson et al., J. Med. Chem., 31, 1412 (1988), taught the separation of the R and S enantiomers of fluoxetine and showed that their activity as serotonin uptake inhibitors is similar to each other.
  • the word “fluoxetine” will be used to mean any acid addition salt or the free base, and to include either the racemic mixture or either of the R and S enantiomers;
  • Duloxetine N -methyl-3-(1-naphthalenyloxy)-3-(2-thienyl)propanamine, is usually administered as the hydrochloride salt and as the (+) enantiomer. It was first taught by U.S. Pat. No. 4,956,388, which shows its high potency. The word “duloxetine” will be used here to refer to any acid addition salt or the free base of the molecule;
  • Venlafaxine is known in the literature, and its method of synthesis and its activity as an inhibitor of serotonin and norepinephrine uptake are taught by U.S. Pat. No. 4,761,501. Venlafaxine is identified as compound A in that patent;
  • Citalopram 1-[3-(dimethylamino)propyl]-1-(4-fluorophenyl)-1,3-dihydro-5-isobenzofurancarbonitrile, is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,136,193 as a serotonin reuptake inhibitor. Its pharmacology was disclosed by Christensen et al., Eur. J. Pharmacol., 41, 153 (1977), and reports of its clinical effectiveness in depression may be found in Dufour et al., Int. Clin. Psychopharmacol., 2, 225 (1987), and Timmerman et al., ibid., 239;
  • Paroxetine trans-( ⁇ )-3-[(1,3-benzodioxol-5-yloxy)methyl]-4-(4-fluorophenyl)piperidine, may be found in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,912,743 and 4,007,196. Reports of the drug's activity are in Lassen, Eur. J. Pharmacol., 47, 351 (1978); Hassan et al., Brit. J. Clin. Pharmacol., 19, 705 (1985); Laursen et al., Acta Psychiat. Scand., 71, 249 (1985); and Battegay et al., Neuropsychobiology, 13, 31 (1985); and
  • the adjunctive therapy of this aspect of the present invention is carried out by administering a vasopressin V 1a antagonist together with a serotonin reuptake inhibitor in any manner that provides effective levels of the compounds in the body at the same time.
  • All of the compounds concerned are orally available and are normally administered orally, and so oral administration of the adjunctive combination is preferred. They may be administered together, in a single dosage form, or may be administered separately.
  • This aspect of the present invention provides a potentiation of the decrease in the concentration of vasopressin observed as an effect of administration of a vasopressin V 1a antagonist by administration of a serotonin reuptake inhibitor.
  • This aspect of the present invention is particularly suited for use in the treatment of depression and obsessive compulsive disorder. Such disorders may often be resistant to treatment with a serotonin reuptake inhibitor alone.
  • Oxytocin preparations and a number of oxytocin agonists are commercially available for therapeutic use.
  • oxytocin antagonists with antiuterotonic activity have been developed and evaluated for their potential use in the treatment of preterm labor and dysmenorrhyea (Pavo et al., J. Med. Chem., 37, 255-259 (1994); Akerlund et al., Br. J. Obstet. Gynaecol., 94, 1040-1044 (1987); Akerlund et al., Br. J. Obstet. Gynaecol., 86, 484-487 (1979)).
  • the oxytocin antagonist atosiban has been studied clinically and resulted in a more significant inhibition of preterm contractions than did placebo (Goodwin et al., Am. J. Obstet. Gynecol., 170, 474 (1994)).
  • the human oxytocin receptor has been cloned and expressed (Kimura et al., Nature, 356, 526-529 (1992)), it is identified under the accession number X64878.
  • binding studies were performed using a cell line expressing the human oxytocin receptor in 293 cells (henceforth referred to as the OTR cell line) substantially by the procedure described by Morel et al. ( Nature, 356, 523-526 (1992)).
  • the 293 cell line is a permanent line of primary human embryonal kidney cells transformed by sheared human adenovirus type t DNA. It is identified as ATCC CRL-1533.
  • the OTR cell line was grown in DMEM (Delbecco's Modified Essential Medium, Sigma, St. Louis, Mo., USA) with 10% fetal bovine serum, 2 mM L-glutamine, 200 ⁇ g hygromycin (Sigma, St. Louis, Mo., USA) and 250 ⁇ g/ml G418 (Gibco, Grand Island, N.Y., USA).
  • DMEM Delbecco's Modified Essential Medium
  • 2 mM L-glutamine 200 ⁇ g hygromycin
  • 250 ⁇ g/ml G418 Gibco, Grand Island, N.Y., USA
  • the pellet was resuspended in 40 mL of Tris-HCl (tris[hydroxymethyl]aminomethane hydro-chloride) buffer (50 mM, pH 7.4) and homogenized for 1 minute with a Tekmar Tissumizer (Cincinnatti, Ohio USA). The suspension was centrifuged at 40,000 ⁇ g for 10 minutes. The pellet was resuspended and centrifuged as above. The final pellet was suspended in 80 mL of Tris 7.4 buffer and stored in 4 mL aliquots at ⁇ 80° C. For assay, aliquots were resuspended in assay buffer and diluted to 375 ⁇ g protein per mL. Protein concentration was determined by BCA assay (Pierce, Rockford, Ill., USA).
  • Assay buffer was 50 mM Tris-HCl (tris[hydroxymethyl]aminomethane hydrochloride), 5 mM MgCl 2 , and 0.1% bovine serum albumin at pH 7.4.
  • the radioligand for binding assays was [ 3 H]oxytocin ([tyrosyl-2,6- 3 H]oxytocin, 48.5 Ci/mmol, DuPont NEN, Boston, Mass., USA).
  • the order of additions was 195 ⁇ L assay buffer, 200 ⁇ L OTR membranes (75 ⁇ g protein) in assay buffer, 5 ⁇ L of test agent in dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) or DMSO alone, and 100 ⁇ L [ 3 H]oxytocin in assay buffer (final concentration 1.0 nM). Incubations were for one hour at room temperature. Bound radioligand was separated from free by filtration on a Brandel cell harvester (Gaithersburg, Md., USA) through Whatman GF/B glass-fiber filters that had been soaked for 2 hours in 0.3% polyethylenimine.
  • the filters were washed with ice-cold 50 mM Tris-HCl (pH 7.7 at 25° C.) and the filter circles were placed in scintillation vials, to which were then added 5 mL Ready Protein PlusTM scintillation fluid, and counted in a liquid scintillation counter. All incubations were in triplicate, and dose-inhibition curves consisted of total binding, nonspecific binding (100 ⁇ M oxytocin, Sigma, St. Louis, Mo., USA), and 6 or 7 concentrations of test agent encompassing the IC 50 . Total binding was typically about 1,000 cpm and nonspecific binding about 200 cpm. IC 50 values were calculated by nonlinear least-squares curve-fitting to a 4-parameter logistic model. Certain compounds of formula I have shown affinity for the oxytocin receptor.
  • bioassays are available to determine the agonist or antagonist character of compounds exhibiting affinity at the oxytocin receptor.
  • One such assay is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,373,089, hereby incorporated by reference.
  • Said bioassay is derived from procedures described in a paper by Sawyer et al. ( Endocrinology, 106, 81 (1980)), which in turn was based on a report of Holton ( Brit. J. Pharmacol., 3, 328 (1948)).
  • the assay calculations for pA 2 estimates are described by Schild ( Brit. J. Pharmacol., 2, 189 (1947)).
  • Buffer/Assay Bath The buffer used is Munsicks. This buffer contains 0.5 mM Mg 2+ . The buffer is gassed continuously with 95% oxygen/5% carbon dioxide giving a pH of 7.4. The temperature of the assay bath is 37° C. A 10 mL assay bath is used that contains a water jacket for maintaining the temperature and inlet and outlet spikets for adding and removing buffer.
  • Polygraph/transducer The piece of uterine tissue used for the assay is anchored at one end and connected to a Statham Strain Gauge Force Transducer at the other end which in turn is attached to a Grass Polygraph Model 79 for monitoring the contractions.
  • oxytocin Calbiochemical, San Diego, Calif.
  • the tissue is exposed to oxytocin (Calbiochemical, San Diego, Calif.) for one minute and washed out. There is a three minute interval before addition of the next dose of agonist or antagonist. When the antagonist is tested, it is given five minutes before the agonist. The agonist is given for one minute. All responses are integrated using a 7P10 Grass Integrator. A single concentration of oxytocin, equal to 80% of the maximum response, is used to test the antagonist. Three different concentrations of antagonists are used, two that will reduce the response to the agonist by less than 50% and one that will reduce the response greater than 50% (ideally this relation would be 25%, 50% and 75%). This is repeated three times for each dose of antagonist for a three point assay.
  • pA 2 The dose-response (DR) ratios are calculated for antagonist and a Schild's Plot is performed by plotting the Log (DR-1) vs. Log of antagonist concentration. The line plotted is calculated by least-squares regression analysis.
  • the pA 2 is the concentration of antagonist at the point where the regression line crosses the 0 point of the Log (DR-1) ordinate.
  • the pA 2 is the negative Log of the concentration of antagonist that will reduce the response to the agonist by one-half.
  • Oxytocin is well known for its hormonal role in parturition and lactation. Oxytocin agonists are useful clinically to induce lactation; induce or augment labor; control postpartum uterine atony and hemmorhage; cause uterine contraction after cesarean section or during other uterine surgery; and to induce therapeutic abortion. Oxytocin, acting as a neurotransmitter in the central nervous system, also plays an important role in the expression of central functions such as maternal behavior, sexual behavior (including penile erection, lordosis and copulatory behavior), yawning, tolerance and dependance mechanisms, feeding, grooming, cardiovascular regulation and thermoregulation (Argiolas and Gessa, Neuroscience and Biobehavioral Reviews, 15, 217-231 (1991)). Oxytocin antagonists find therapeutic utility as agents for the delay or prevention of premature labor; or to slow or arrest delivery for brief periods in order to undertake other therapeutic measures.
  • Tachykinins are a family of peptides which share a common amidated carboxy terminal sequence.
  • Substance P was the first peptide of this family to be isolated, although its purification and the determination of its primary sequence did not occur until the early 1970's.
  • neurokinin A also known as substance K, neuromedin 1, and neurokinin ⁇
  • neurokinin B also known as neuromedin K and neurokinin ⁇ .
  • Tachykinins are widely distributed in both the central and peripheral nervous systems. When released from nerves, they exert a variety of biological actions, which, in most cases, depend upon activation of specific receptors expressed on the membrane of target cells. Tachykinins are also produced by a number of non-neural tissues. The mammalian tachykinins substance P, neurokinin A, and neurokinin B act through three major receptor subtypes, denoted as NK-1, NK-2, and NK-3, respectively. These receptors are present in a variety of organs.
  • Substance P is believed inter alia to be involved in the neurotransmission of pain sensations, including the pain associated with migraine headaches and with arthritis. These peptides have also been implicated in gastrointestinal disorders and diseases of the gastrointestinal tract such as inflammatory bowel disease. Tachykinins have also been implicated as playing a role in numerous other maladies, as discussed infra.
  • tachykinin receptor antagonists In view of the wide number of clinical maladies associated with an excess of tachykinins, the development of tachykinin receptor antagonists will serve to control these clinical conditions.
  • the earliest tachykinin receptor antagonists were peptide derivatives. These antagonists proved to be of limited pharmaceutical utility because of their metabolic instability.
  • Recent publications have described novel classes of non-peptidyl tachykinin receptor antagonists which generally have greater oral bioavailability and metabolic stability than the earlier classes of tachykinin receptor antagonists. Examples of such newer non-peptidyl tachykinin receptor antagonists are found in European Patent Publication 591,040 A1, published Apr. 6, 1994; Patent Cooperation Treaty publication WO 94/01402, published Jan.
  • Radioreceptor binding assays were performed using a derivative of a previously published protocol. D. G. Payan et al., Journal of Immunology, 133, 3260-3265 (1984). In this assay an aliquot of IM9 cells (1 ⁇ 10 6 cells/tube in RPMI 1604 medium supplemented with 10% fetal calf serum) was incubated with 20 ⁇ M 125 I-labeled substance P in the presence of increasing competitor concentrations for 45 minutes at 4° C.
  • the IM9 cell line is a well-characterized cell line which is readily available to the public. See, e.g., Annals of the New York Academy of Science, 190, 221-234 (1972); Nature ( London ), 251, 443-444 (1974); Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences ( USA ), 71, 84-88 (1974). These cells were routinely cultured in RPMI 1640 supplemented with 50 ⁇ g/mL gentamicin sulfate and 10% fetal calf serum.
  • reaction was terminated by filtration through a glass fiber filter harvesting system using filters previously soaked for 20 minutes in 0.1% polyethylenimine. Specific binding of labeled substance P was determined in the presence of 20 nM unlabeled ligand.
  • the CHO-hNK-2R cells a CHO-derived cell line transformed with the human NK-2 receptor, expressing about 400,000 such receptors per cell, were grown in 75 cm 2 flasks or roller bottles in minimal essential medium (alpha modification) with 10% fetal bovine serum.
  • minimal essential medium alpha modification
  • the gene sequence of the human NK-2 receptor is given in N. P. Gerard et al., Journal of Biological Chemistry, 265, 20455-20462 (1990).
  • Membranes were prepared by homogenization of the cell pellets in 300 mL 50 mM-Tris buffer, pH 7.4 with a Tekmar® homogenizer for 10-15 seconds, followed by centrifugation at 12,000 RPM (20,000 ⁇ g) for 30 minutes using a Beckman JA-14® rotor. The pellets were washed once using the above procedure and the final pellets were resuspended in 100-120 mL 50 mM Tris buffer, pH 7.4, and 4 ml aliquots stored frozen at ⁇ 70° C. The protein concentration of this preparation was 2 mg/mL.
  • CHO-hNK-2R membrane preparation For the receptor binding assay, one 4-mL aliquot of the CHO-hNK-2R membrane preparation was suspended in 40 mL of assay buffer containing 50 mM Tris, pH 7.4, 3 mM manganese chloride, 0.02% bovine serum albumin (BSA) and 4 ⁇ g/mL chymostatin. A 200 ⁇ L volume of the homogenate (40 ⁇ g protein) was used per sample.
  • the radioactive ligand was [ 125 I]iodohistidyl-neurokinin A (New England Nuclear, NEX-252), 2200 Ci/mmol.
  • the ligand was prepared in assay buffer at 20 nCi per 100 ⁇ L; the final concentration in the assay was 20 pM. Non-specific binding was determined using 1 ⁇ M eledoisin. Ten concentrations of eledoisin from 0.1 to 1000 nM were used for a standard concentration-response curve.
  • DMSO dimethylsulfoxide
  • IC 50 IC 50 determinations.
  • the order of additions for incubation was 190 or 195 ⁇ L assay buffer, 200 ⁇ L homogenate, 10 or 5 ⁇ L sample in DMSO, 100 ⁇ L radioactive ligand.
  • the samples were incubated 1 hr at room temperature and then filtered on a cell harvester through filters which had been presoaked for two hours in 50 mM Tris buffer, pH 7.7, containing 0.5% BSA. The filter was washed 3 times with approximately 3 mL of cold 50 mM. Tris buffer, pH 7.7. The filter circles were then punched into 12 ⁇ 75 mm polystyrene tubes and counted in a gamma counter.
  • Tachykinin receptor antagonists are of value in the treatment of a wide variety of clinical conditions which are characterized by the presence of an excess of tachykinin.
  • These clinical conditions may include disorders of the central nervous system such as anxiety, depression, psychosis, and schizophrenia; neurodegenerative disorders such as dementia, including senile dementia of the Alzheimer's type, Alzheimer's disease, AIDS-associated dementia, and Down's syndrome; demyelinating diseases such as multiple sclerosis and amyotrophic lateral sclerosis and other neuropathological disorders such as peripheral neuropathy, such as diabetic and chemotherapy-induced neuropathy, and post-herpetic and other neuralgias; acute and chronic obstructive airway diseases such as adult respiratory distress syndrome, bronchopneumonia, bronchospasm, chronic bronchitis, drivercough, and asthma; inflammatory diseases such as inflammatory bowel disease, psoriasis, fibrositis, osteoarthritis, and rheumatoid arthritis; disorders of the
  • NK-1 antagonists are useful in the treatment of pain, especially chronic pain, such as neuropathic pain, post-operative pain, and migraines, pain associated with arthritis, cancer-associated pain, chronic lower back pain, cluster headaches, herpes neuralgia, phantom limb pain, central pain, dental pain, neuropathic pain, opioid-resistant pain, visceral pain, surgical pain, bone injury pain, pain during labor and delivery, pain resulting from burns, including sunburn, post partum pain, angina pain, and genitourinary tract-related pain including cystitis.
  • chronic pain such as neuropathic pain, post-operative pain, and migraines, pain associated with arthritis, cancer-associated pain, chronic lower back pain, cluster headaches, herpes neuralgia, phantom limb pain, central pain, dental pain, neuropathic pain, opioid-resistant pain, visceral pain, surgical pain, bone injury pain, pain during labor and delivery, pain resulting from burns, including sunburn, post partum pain, angina pain, and gen
  • NK-1 antagonists are especially useful in the treatment and prevention of urinary incontinence; irritative symptoms of benign prostatic hypertrophy; motility disorders of the gastrointestinal tract, such as irritable bowel syndrome; acute and chronic obstructive airway diseases, such as bronchospasm, bronchopneumonia, asthma, and adult respiratory distress syndrome; artherosclerosis; inflammatory conditions, such as inflammatory bowel disease, ulcerative colitis, Crohn's disease, rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis, neurogenic inflammation, allergies, rhinitis, cough, dermatitis, urticaria, psoriasis, conjunctivitis, emesis, irritation-induced miosis; tissue transplant rejection; plasma extravasation resulting from cytokine chemotherapy and the like; spinal cord trauma; stroke; cerebral stroke (ischemia); Alzheimer's disease; Parkinson's disease; multiple sclerosis; amyotrophic lateral sclerosis; schizophrenia; anxiety; and depression.
  • inflammatory conditions
  • NK-2 antagonists are useful in the treatment of urinary incontinence, bronchospasm, asthma, adult respiratory distress syndrome, motility disorders of the gastrointestinal tract, such as irritable bowel syndrome, and pain.
  • the compounds of the invention may be useful in the treatment of emesis, including acute, delayed, or anticipatory emesis, such as emesis induced by chemotherapy, radiation, toxins, pregnancy, vestibular disorders, motion, surgery, migraine, and variations in intercranial pressure.
  • emesis induced by chemotherapy, radiation, toxins, pregnancy, vestibular disorders, motion, surgery, migraine, and variations in intercranial pressure.
  • the compounds of formula I are of use in the treatment of emesis induced by antineoplastic (cytotoxic) agents including those routinely used in cancer chemotherapy.
  • chemotherapeutic agents include alkylating agents, for example, nitrogen mustards, ethyleneimine compounds, alkyl sulfonates, and other compounds with an alkylating action, such as nitrosoureas, cisplatin, and dacarbazine; antimetabolites, for example, folic acid, purine, or pyrimidine antagonists; mitotic inhibitors, for example vinca alkaloids and derivatives of podophyllotoxin; and cytotoxic antibiotics.
  • alkylating agents for example, nitrogen mustards, ethyleneimine compounds, alkyl sulfonates, and other compounds with an alkylating action, such as nitrosoureas, cisplatin, and dacarbazine
  • antimetabolites for example, folic acid, purine, or pyrimidine antagonists
  • mitotic inhibitors for example vinca alkaloids and derivatives of podophyllotoxin
  • cytotoxic antibiotics include cytotoxic antibiotics.
  • chemotherapeutic agents are described, for instance, by D. J. Stewart in N AUSEA AND V OMITING : R ECENT R ESEARCH AND C LINICAL A DVANCES , (J. Kucharczyk et al., eds., 1991), at pages 177-203.
  • chemotherapeutic agents include cisplatin, dacarbazine (DTIC), dactinomycin, mechlorethamine (nitrogen mustard), streptozocin, cyclophosphamide, carmustine (BCNU), lomustine (CCNU), doxorubicin, daunorubicin, procarbazine, mitomycin, cytarabine, etoposide, methotrexate, 5-fluorouracil, vinblastine, vincristine, bleomycin, and chlorambucil.
  • DTIC dacarbazine
  • dactinomycin mechlorethamine (nitrogen mustard)
  • streptozocin cyclophosphamide
  • BCNU carmustine
  • CCNU lomustine
  • doxorubicin daunorubicin
  • procarbazine mitomycin
  • cytarabine etoposide
  • methotrexate 5-fluorouracil
  • the compounds of formula I may also be of use in the treatment of emesis induced by radiation, including radiation therapy such as in the treatment of cancer, or radiation sickness; and in the treatment of post-operative nausea and vomiting.
  • compositions comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient and at least one active ingredient.
  • These compositions can be administered by a variety of routes including oral, rectal, transdermal, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, and intranasal.
  • Many of the compounds employed in the methods of this invention are effective as both injectable and oral compositions.
  • Such compositions are prepared in a manner well known in the pharmaceutical art and comprise at least one active compound. See, e.g., R EMINGTON'S P HARMACEUTICAL S CIENCES , (16th ed. 1980).
  • the active ingredient is usually mixed with an excipient, diluted by an excipient, or enclosed within such a carrier which can be in the form of a capsule, sachet, paper, or other container.
  • a carrier which can be in the form of a capsule, sachet, paper, or other container.
  • the excipient serves as a diluent, it can be a solid, semi-solid, or liquid material, which acts as a vehicle, carrier or medium for the active ingredient.
  • compositions can be in the form of tablets, pills, powders, lozenges, sachets, cachets, elixirs, suspensions, emulsions, solutions, syrups, aerosols (as a solid or in a liquid medium), ointments containing for example up to 10% by weight of the active compound, soft and hard gelatin capsules, suppositories, sterile injectable solutions, and sterile packaged powders.
  • the active compound In preparing a formulation, it may be necessary to mill the active compound to provide the appropriate particle size prior to combining with the other ingredients. If the active compound is substantially insoluble, it ordinarily is milled to a particle size of less than 200 mesh. If the active compound is substantially water soluble, the particle size is normally adjusted by milling to provide a substantially uniform distribution in the formulation, e.g. about 40 mesh.
  • excipients include lactose, dextrose, sucrose, sorbitol, mannitol, starches, gum acacia, calcium phosphate, alginates, tragacanth, gelatin, calcium silicate, microcrystalline cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, cellulose, water, syrup, and methyl cellulose.
  • the formulations can additionally include: lubricating agents such as talc, magnesium stearate, and mineral oil; wetting agents; emulsifying and suspending agents; preserving agents such as methyl- and propylhydroxybenzoates; sweetening agents; and flavoring agents.
  • the compositions of the invention can be formulated so as to provide quick, sustained or delayed release of the active ingredient after administration to the patient by employing procedures known in the art.
  • compositions are preferably formulated in a unit dosage form, each dosage containing from about 0.05 to about 100 mg, more usually about 1.0 to about 30 mg, of the active ingredient.
  • unit dosage form refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects and other mammals, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with a suitable pharmaceutical excipient.
  • the active compounds are generally effective over a wide dosage range.
  • dosages per day normally fall within the range of about 0.01 to about 30 mg/kg of body weight.
  • the range of about 0.1 to about 15 mg/kg/day, in single or divided dose is especially preferred.
  • the amount of the compound actually administered will be determined by a physician, in the light of the relevant circumstances, including the condition to be treated, the chosen route of administration, the actual compound or compounds administered, the age, weight, and response of the individual patient, and the severity of the patient's symptoms, and therefore the above dosage ranges are not intended to limit the scope of the invention in any way.
  • dosage levels below the lower limit of the aforesaid range may be more than adequate, while in other cases still larger doses may be employed without causing any harmful side effect, provided that such larger doses are first divided into several smaller doses for administration throughout the day.
  • Hard gelatin capsules containing the following ingredients are prepared: Quantity Ingredient (mg/capsule) Compound of Example 35 30.0 Starch 305.0 Magnesium stearate 5.0 The above ingredients are mixed and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 340 mg quantities.
  • a tablet formula is prepared using the ingredients below: Quantity Ingredient (mg/tablet) Compound of Example 95 25.0 Cellulose, microcrystalline 200.0 Colloidal silicon dioxide 10.0 Stearic acid 5.0 The components are blended and compressed to form tablets, each weighing 240 mg.
  • a dry powder inhaler formulation is prepared containing the following components: Ingredient Weight % Compound of Example 63 5 Lactose 95 The active mixture is mixed with the lactose and the mixture is added to a dry powder inhaling appliance.
  • Tablets each containing 30 mg of active ingredient, are prepared as follows: Quantity Ingredient (mg/tablet) Compound of Example 103 30.0 mg Starch 45.0 mg Microcrystalline cellulose 35.0 mg Polyvinylpyrrolidone (as 10% solution in water) 4.0 mg Sodium carboxymethyl starch 4.5 mg Magnesium stearate 0.5 mg Talc 1.0 mg Total 120 mg
  • Quantity Ingredient mg/tablet
  • Compound of Example 103 30.0 mg
  • Starch 45.0 mg
  • Microcrystalline cellulose 35.0 mg
  • Polyvinylpyrrolidone (as 10% solution in water)
  • Sodium carboxymethyl starch 4.5 mg
  • the active ingredient, starch, and cellulose are passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve and mixed thoroughly.
  • the solution of polyvinylpyrrolidone is mixed with the resultant powders, which are then passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve
  • Capsules each containing 40 mg of medicament are made as follows: Quantity Ingredient (mg/capsule) Compound of Example 104 40.0 mg Starch 109.0 mg Magnesium stearate 1.0 mg Total 150.0 mg The active ingredient, cellulose, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 150 mg quantities.
  • Suppositories each containing 25 mg of active ingredient are made as follows: Ingredient Amount Compound of Example 110 25 mg Saturated fatty acid glycerides to 2,000 mg The active ingredient is passed through a No. 60 mesh U.S. sieve and suspended in the saturated fatty acid glycerides previously melted using the minimum heat necessary. The mixture is then poured into a suppository mold of nominal 2.0 g capacity and allowed to cool.
  • Suspensions each containing 50 mg of medicament per 5.0 ml dose are made as follows: Ingredient Amount Compound of Example 111 50.0 mg Xanthan gum 4.0 mg Sodium carboxymethyl cellulose (11%) 50.0 mg Microcrystalline cellulose (89%) Sucrose 1.75 g Sodium benzoate 10.0 mg Flavor and Color q.v. Purified water to 5.0 ml The medicament, sucrose, and xanthan gum are blended, passed through a No. 10 mesh U.S. sieve, and then mixed with a previously made solution of the microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose in water. The sodium benzoate, flavor, and color are diluted with some of the water and added with stirring. Sufficient water is then added to produce the required volume.
  • Capsules each containing 15 mg of medicament, are made as follows: Quantity Ingredient (mg/capsule) Compound of Example 112 15.0 mg Starch 407.0 mg Magnesium stearate 3.0 mg Total 425.0 mg The active ingredient, cellulose, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 425 mg quantities.
  • An intravenous formulation may be prepared as follows: Ingredient Quantity Compound of Example 120 250.0 mg Isotonic saline 1000 ml
  • a topical formulation may be prepared as follows: Ingredient Quantity Compound of Example 35 1-10 g Emulsifying Wax 30 g Liquid Paraffin 20 g White Soft Paraffin to 100 g The white soft paraffin is heated until molten. The liquid paraffin and emulsifying wax are incorporated and stirred until dissolved. The active ingredient is added and stirring is continued until dispersed. The mixture is then cooled until solid.
  • Sublingual or buccal tablets each containing 10 mg of active ingredient, may be prepared as follows: Quantity Ingredient Per Tablet Compound of Example 95 10.0 mg Glycerol 210.5 mg Water 143.0 mg Sodium Citrate 4.5 mg Polyvinyl Alcohol 26.5 mg Polyvinylpyrrolidone 15.5 mg Total 410.0 mg
  • Quantity Ingredient Per Tablet Compound of Example 95 10.0 mg Glycerol 210.5 mg Water 143.0 mg Sodium Citrate 4.5 mg Polyvinyl Alcohol 26.5 mg Polyvinylpyrrolidone 15.5 mg Total 410.0 mg
  • the glycerol, water, sodium citrate, polyvinyl alcohol, and polyvinylpyrrolidone are admixed together by continuous stirring and maintaining the temperature at about 90° C. When the polymers have gone into solution, the resulting solution is cooled to about 50-55° C. and the medicament is slowly admixed.
  • the homogenous mixture is poured into forms made of an inert material to produce a drug-containing diffusion matrix having a
  • transdermal delivery devices Such transdermal patches may be used to provide continuous or discontinuous infusion of the compounds of the present invention in controlled amounts.
  • the construction and use of transdermal patches for the delivery of pharmaceutical agents is well known in the art. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,023,252, issued Jun. 11, 1991, herein incorporated by reference.
  • patches may be constructed for continuous, pulsatile, or on demand delivery of pharmaceutical agents.
  • Indirect techniques usually involve formulating the compositions to provide for drug latentiation by the conversion of hydrophilic drugs into lipid-soluble drugs or prodrugs.
  • Latentiation is generally achieved through blocking of the hydroxy, carbonyl, sulfate, and primary amine groups present on the drug to render the drug more lipid soluble and amenable to transportation across the blood-brain barrier.
  • the delivery of hydrophilic drugs may be enhanced by intra-arterial infusion of hypertonic solutions that can transiently open the blood-brain barrier.
  • the type of formulation employed for the administration of the compounds employed in the methods of the present invention may be dictated by the particular compounds employed, the type of pharmacokinetic profile desired from the route of administration and the compound(s), and the state of the patient.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)
  • Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Diabetes (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Addiction (AREA)
  • Dermatology (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Endocrinology (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Reproductive Health (AREA)
  • Otolaryngology (AREA)
  • Vascular Medicine (AREA)
  • Emergency Medicine (AREA)
  • Transplantation (AREA)

Abstract

Novel 2-(azetidin-2-on-1-yl)alkanedioic acid derivatives and 2-(azetidin-2-on-1-yl)alkoxyalkanoic acid derivatives are described for use in the treatment of disease states responsive to antagonism of the vasopressin V1a receptor.

Description

    FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention relates to novel 2-(azetidin-2-on-1-yl)alkanedioic acid derivatives as vasopressin V1a receptor antagonists. The present invention also relates to methods of treating mammals in need of relief from disease states associated with and responsive to the antagonism of the vasopressin V1a receptor.
    • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • Vasopressin, a neurohypophyseal neuropeptide produced in the hypothalamus, is involved in water metabolism homeostasis, renal function, mediation of cardiovascular function, non-opioid mediation of tolerance for pain, and regulation of temperature in mammals. In addition to being released into the circulation V1a the posterior pituitary, vasopressin acts as a neurotransmitter in the brain. Three vasopressin receptor subtypes, designated V1a, V1b, and V2 have been identified. The human V1a receptor has been cloned (Thibonnier et al., The Journal of Biological Chemistry, 269(5), 3304-3310 (1994)), and has been shown by radioligand binding techniques to be present in vascular smooth muscle cells, hepatocytes, blood platelets, lymphocytes and monocytes, type II pneumocytes, adrenal cortex, brain, reproductive organs, retinal epithelium, renal mesangial cells, and the A10, A7r5, 3T3 and WRK-1 cell lines (Thibonnier, Neuroendocrinology of the Concepts in Neurosurgery Series 5, (Selman, W., ed), 19-30, Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore, (1993)).
  • Structural modification of vasopressin has provided a number of vasopressin agonists (Sawyer, Pharmacol. Reviews, 13, 255 (1961)). In addition, several potent and selective vasopressin peptide antagonists have been designed (Lazslo et al., Pharmacological Reviews, 43, 73-108 (1991); Mah and Hofbauer, Drugs of the Future, 12, 1055-1070 (1987); Manning and Sawyer, Trends in Neuroscience, 7, 8-9 (1984)). Their lack of oral bioavailability and short half-life, however, have limited the therapeutic potential of these analogs. While novel structural classes of non-peptidyl vasopressin V1a antagonists have been discovered (Yamamura et al., Science, 275, 572-574 (1991); Serradiel-Le Gal et al., Journal of Clinical Investigation, 92, 224-231 (1993); Serradiel-Le Gal et al., Biochemical Pharmacology, 47(4), 633-641 (1994)), a clinical candidate has yet to be identified.
  • The general structural class of substituted 2-(azetidin-2-on-1-yl)acetic acid esters and amides are known as synthetic intermediates for the preparation of β-lactam antibiotics (see e.g. U.S. Pat. No. 4,751,299).
    • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • It has been found that certain compounds within the general class of 2-(azetidin-2-on-1-yl)alkanedioic acid derivatives elicit activity at the vasopressin Via receptor. The present invention describes novel 2-(azetidin-2-on-1-yl)alkanedioic acid esters and amides useful for treating disease states that are associated with and responsive to antagonism of a vasopressin V1a receptor in a mammal.
  • The invention also describes a method for treating a disease state responsive to the antagonism of a vasopressin V1a receptor, in a mammal in need of such treatment, comprising the step of administering to the mammal a pharmaceutically effective amount of such 2-(azetidin-2-on-1-yl)alkanedioic acid derivatives.
  • In particular, the present invention describes compounds having the formula I:
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00001
    wherein:
  • n is an integer from 0 to 2;
  • A is R6O—, monosubstituted amino, or disubstituted amino;
  • A′ is R6′O—, monosubstituted amino, or disubstituted amino;
  • R2 is hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl;
  • R3 is a structure selected from the group consisting of
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00002
  • R4 is C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C3-C9 cycloalkenyl, limonenyl, pinenyl, C1-C3 alkanoyl, optionally-substituted aryl, optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl(C2-C4 alkenyl), or optionally-substituted aryl(C2-C4 alkynyl);
  • R6 and R6′ are each independently selected from the group consisting of C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, (C1-C4 alkoxy)-(C1-C4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), a first heterocycle Y—, Y—(C1-C4 alkyl), a second heterocycle Y′—, Y′—(C1-C4 alkyl), R7R8N—(C2-C4 alkyl), and R7R8N—(C2-C4 alkyl);
      • where the first heterocycle Y and the second heterocycle Y′ are each independently selected from the group consisting of tetrahydrofuryl, morpholinyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, homopiperazinyl, or quinuclidinyl; where said morpholinyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, homopiperazinyl, or quinuclidinyl is optionally N-substituted with C1-C4 alkyl or optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl);
  • R7 is hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl;
  • R8 is C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, optionally-substituted aryl, or optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl); or
      • R7 and R8 are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, and homopiperazinyl; where said piperazinyl or homopiperazinyl is optionally N-substituted with R12;
  • R7′ is hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl;
  • R8′ is C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, optionally-substituted aryl, or optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl); or
  • R7′ and R8′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, and homopiperazinyl; where said piperazinyl or homopiperazinyl is optionally N-substituted with R12′;
  • R10 and R11 are each independently chosen from the group consisting of hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C5 alkanoyloxy, benzyloxy, benzoyloxy, diphenylmethoxy, triphenylmethoxy, optionally-substituted aryl, and optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl);
      • where the C1-C6 alkyl or the C3-C8 cycloalkyl is optionally monosubstituted with a substituent selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, protected carboxy, carbamoyl, thiobenzyl and C1-C4 thioalkyl; and,
      • where the benzyl of said benzyloxy or said benzoyloxy is optionally substituted with one or two substituents independently selected from the group consisting of C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, carbamoyl, amino, mono(C1-C4 alkyl)amino, di(C1-C4 alkyl)amino, C1-C4 alkylsulfonylamino, and nitro;
  • R12 and R12′ are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxycarbonyl, optionally-substituted aryloxycarbonyl, optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), and optionally-substituted aryloyl; and
  • hydrates, solvates and pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts thereof; and
  • providing that:
  • a) when A is R6O—, then A′ is not benzylamino or substituted benzylamino;
  • b) when A is R6O— and the integer n is 0, then A′ is not R6′O—; and
  • c) when A is monosubstituted amino and the integer n is 0, then A′ is not anilinyl, substituted anilinyl, benzylamino, or substituted benzylamino.
  • In addition, the present invention describes compounds having the formula II:
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00003
    wherein:
  • n′ is an integer from 1 to 3;
  • A is R6O—, monosubstituted amino, or disubstituted amino;
  • R2 is hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl;
  • R3 is a structure selected from the group consisting of
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00004
  • R4 is C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C3-C9 cycloalkenyl, limonenyl, pinenyl, C1-C3 alkanoyl, optionally-substituted aryl, optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl(halo C1-C4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl(alkoxy C1-C4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl(C2-C4 alkenyl), optionally-substituted aryl(halo C2-C4 alkenyl), or optionally-substituted aryl(C2-C4 alkynyl);
  • R6 is selected from the group consisting of C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, (C1-C4 alkoxy)-(C1-C4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), a first heterocycle Y—, Y—(C1-C4 alkyl), and R7R8N—(C2-C4 alkyl);
      • where the first heterocycle Y is selected from the group consisting of tetrahydrofuryl, morpholinyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, homopiperazinyl, or quinuclidinyl; where said morpholinyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, homopiperazinyl, or quinuclidinyl is optionally N-substituted with C1-C4 alkyl or optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl);
  • R6′ is selected from the group consisting of C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, (C1-C4 alkoxy)-(C1-C4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), Y′—(C1-C4 alkyl), where Y′— is a second heterocycle, and R7R8N—(C2-C4 alkyl);
      • where the second heterocycle Y′ is selected from the group consisting of tetrahydrofuryl, morpholinyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, homopiperazinyl, or quinuclidinyl; where said morpholinyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, homopiperazinyl, or quinuclidinyl is optionally N-substituted with C1-C4 alkyl or optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl);
  • R7 is hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl;
  • R8 is C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, optionally-substituted aryl, or optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl); or
      • R7 and R8 are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, and homopiperazinyl; where said piperazinyl or homopiperazinyl is optionally N-substituted with R12;
  • R7′ is hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl;
  • R8′ is C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 Bcycloalkyl, optionally-substituted aryl, or optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl); or
      • R7′ and R8′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, and homopiperazinyl; where said piperazinyl or homopiperazinyl is optionally N-substituted with R12′;
  • R10 and R11 are each independently chosen from the group consisting of hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C5 alkanoyloxy, benzyloxy, benzoyloxy, diphenylmethoxy, triphenylmethoxy, optionally-substituted aryl, and optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl);
      • where the C1-C6 alkyl or the C3-C8 cycloalkyl is optionally monosubstituted with a substituent selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, protected carboxy, carbamoyl, thiobenzyl and C1-C4 thioalkyl; and,
      • where the benzyl of said benzyloxy or said benzoyloxy is optionally substituted with one or two substituents independently selected from the group consisting of C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, carbamoyl, amino, mono(C1-C4 alkyl)amino, di(C1-C4 alkyl)amino, C1-C4 alkylsulfonylamino, and nitro;
  • R12 and R12′ are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxycarbonyl, optionally-substituted aryloxycarbonyl, optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), and optionally-substituted aryloyl; and
  • hydrates, solvates and pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts thereof.
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I and II are described, wherein A is an cyclic disubstituted amino.
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I and II are described 1, wherein A is a cyclic disubstituted amino.
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I and II are described, wherein A is a monosubstituted amino having the formula XNH—, where X is selected from the group consisting of C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, (C1-C4 alkoxy)-(C1-C4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl, optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), the first heterocycle Y, Y—(C1-C4 alkyl), R7R8N—, and R7R8N—(C2-C4 alkyl).
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I and II are described, wherein A is a disubstituted amino having the formula R5XN—; where R5 is selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C4 alkoxycarbonyl, and benzyl; and where X is selected from the group consisting of C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, (C1-C4 alkoxy)-(C1-C4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl, optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), the first heterocycle Y, Y—(C1-C4 alkyl), R7R8N—, and R7R8N—(C2-C4 alkyl).
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I and II are described, wherein A is a disubstituted amino having the formula R5XN—, where R5 and X are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, and homopiperazinyl;
      • where the heterocycle is optionally substituted with R10, R12, R7R8N—, or R7R8N—(C1-C4 alkyl) as defined above.
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I and II are described, wherein R5 and X are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form piperidinyl optionally substituted at the 4-position with hydroxy, C-1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, (C1-C4 alkoxy)carbonyl, (hydroxy(C2-C4 alkyloxy))—(C2-C4 alkyl), R7R8N—, R7R8N—(C1-C4 alkyl), diphenylmethyl, optionally-substituted aryl, optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), or piperidin-1-yl(C1-C4 alkyl).
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I and II are described, wherein R5 and X are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form piperazinyl optionally substituted at the 4-position with C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, optionally-substituted aryl, optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), α-methylbenzyl, N—(C1-C5 alkyl)acetamid-2-yl, N—(C3-C8 cycloalkyl)acetamid-2-yl, R7R8N—, or (C1-C4 alkoxy)carbonyl.
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I and II are described, wherein R5 and X are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form homopiperazinyl optionally substituted in the 4-position with C1-C4 alkyl, aryl, or aryl(C1-C4 alkyl).
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I and II are described, wherein A is a disubstituted amino having the formula R5XN—, where R5 and X are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinonyl, piperidinonyl, 2-(pyrrolidin-1-ylmethyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolin-2-yl.
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I are described, wherein A′ is an acyclic disubstituted amino.
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I are described, wherein A′ is a cyclic disubstituted amino.
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I are described, wherein A′ is a monosubstituted amino having the formula XNH—; where X′ is selected from the group consisting of C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, (C1-C4 alkoxy)-(C1-C4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl, optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), the second heterocycle Y′, Y′—(C1-C4 alkyl), R7′R8′N—, and R7′R8′N—(C2-C4 alkyl).
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I are described, wherein A′ is a disubstituted amino having the formula R5XN—; where R5′ is selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C4 alkoxycarbonyl, and benzyl; and X′ is selected from the group consisting of C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, (C1-C4 alkoxy)-(C1-C4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl, optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), the second heterocycle Y′, Y′—(C1-C4 alkyl), R7′R8′N—, and R7′R8′N—(C2-C4 alkyl).
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I are described, wherein A′ is a disubstituted amino having the formula R5′XN—, where R5′ and X′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, and homopiperazinyl;
      • where the heterocycle is optionally substituted with R10, R12′, R7′, R8′N—, or R7′R8N—(C1-C4 alkyl) as defined above.
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I are described, wherein R5′ and X′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form piperidinyl optionally substituted at the 4-position with hydroxy, C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, (C1-C4 alkoxy)carbonyl, (hydroxy(C1-C4 alkyloxy))-(C1-C4 alkyl), R7′R8′N—, R7′R8′N—(C1-C4 alkyl, diphenylmethyl, optionally-substituted aryl, optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), or piperidin-1-yl(C1-C4 alkyl).
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I are described, wherein R5′ and X′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form piperazinyl optionally substituted at the 4-position with C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, optionally-substituted aryl, optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), α-methylbenzyl, N—(C1-C5 alkyl)acetamid-2-yl, N—(C3-C8 cycloalkyl)acetamid-2-yl, R7′R8′N—, or (C1-C4 alkoxy)carbonyl.
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I are described, wherein R5′ and X′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form homopiperazinyl optionally substituted in the 4-position with C1-C4 alkyl, aryl, or aryl(C1-C4 alkyl).
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I are described, wherein A′ is a disubstituted amino having the formula R5′X′N—, where R5′ and X′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinonyl, piperidinonyl, 2-(pyrrolidin-1-ylmethyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolin-2-yl.
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I and II are described, wherein R4 is optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl(C2-C4 alkenyl), or optionally-substituted aryl(C2-C4 alkynyl).
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I and II are described, wherein R3 is the structure
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00005
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I and II are described, wherein R2 is hydrogen.
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I and II are described, wherein A is a disubstituted amino having the formula R5XN—, where R5 and X are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, and piperazinyl; where said heterocycle is optionally substituted with C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, R7R8N—, R7R8N—(C1-C4 alkyl), option ally-substituted aryl, or optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl).
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I and II are described, wherein A is a monosubstituted amino having the formula XNH—, where X is optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl).
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I and II are described, wherein:
  • R4 is optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), optionally-substituted aryl(C2-C4 alkenyl), or optionally-substituted aryl(C2-C4 alkynyl);
  • R3 is the structure
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00006
  • R2 is hydrogen.
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I are described, wherein A′ is R6′O—, where R6′ is C1-C6 alkyl.
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I are described, wherein A′ is a monosubstituted amino having the formula X′NH—, where X′ is optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), the second heterocycle Y′, Y′—(C1-C4 alkyl), R7′R8′N—, or R7′R8′N—(C2-C4 alkyl).
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I are described, wherein X′ is R7′R8′N— or R7′R8′N—(C2-C4 alkyl).
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I are described, wherein X′ is the second heterocycle Y′ or Y′—(C1-C4 alkyl), where the second heterocycle Y′ is selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, and homopiperazinyl, where said second heterocycle is optionally N-substituted with optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl).
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I and II are described, wherein R8′ is selected from the group consisting of C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, and aryl(C1-C4 alkyl).
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I and II are described, wherein R7′ and R8′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, and homopiperazinyl, where said piperazinyl or homopiperazinyl is optionally substituted at the 4-position with (C1-C4 alkyl), (C3-C8 cycloalkyl), or aryl(C1-C4 alkyl).
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I are described, wherein A′ is a disubstituted amino having the formula R5′XN—.
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I are described, wherein R5 is aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), and X′ is selected from the group consisting of optionally-substituted aryl(C(—C4 alkyl), the second heterocycle Y′, Y′—(C1-C4 alkyl), R7′R8′N—, and R7′R8′N—(C2-C4 alkyl).
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I and II are described, wherein R8′ is selected from the group consisting of C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, and aryl(C1-C4 alkyl).
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I and II are described, wherein R7′ and R8′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, and homopiperazinyl, where said piperazinyl or homopiperazinyl is optionally substituted at the 4-position with (C1-C4 alkyl), (C3-C8 cycloalkyl), or aryl(C1-C4 alkyl).
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I are described, wherein R5′ and X′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidin-1-yl, piperidin-1-yl, piperazin-1-yl, and homopiperazin-1-yl; where said heterocycle is substituted with C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, optionally-substituted aryl, optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), the second heterocycle Y′, Y′—(C1-C4 alkyl), R7′R8′N—, R7′R8′N—(C1-C4 alkyl), or R7′R8′N—C(O)—(C1-C4 alkyl).
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I are described, wherein R5′ and X′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of piperidin-1-yl and piperazin-1-yl, where the heterocycle is substituted with C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), R7′R8′N—, or R7′R8′N—(C1-C4 alkyl).
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I and II are described, wherein R7′ and R8′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, and homopiperazinyl, where said piperazinyl or homopiperazinyl is optionally substituted at the 4-position with (C1-C4 alkyl), (C3-C8 cycloalkyl), or aryl(C1-C4 alkyl).
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I are described, wherein R5′ and X′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen to form piperazin-1-yl, where said piperazin-1-yl is substituted with C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, or aryl(C1-C4 alkyl).
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I are described, wherein the integer n is 1.
  • Illustrative compounds of formula I are described, wherein the integer n is 2.
  • Illustrative compounds of formula II are described, wherein the integer n′ is 1.
  • Illustrative compounds of formula II are described, wherein the integer n′ is 2.
  • The present invention also describes a pharmaceutical comprising a compound selected from those described above, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent, or excipient.
  • The general chemical terms used in the formulae above have their usual meanings. For example, the term “alkyl” includes such groups as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, 2-pentyl, 3-pentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl and the like.
  • The term “cycloalkyl” includes such groups as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, and the like.
  • The term “alkenyl” includes such groups as ethenyl, propenyl, 2-butenyl, and the like.
  • The term “alkynyl” includes such groups as ethynyl, propynyl, 1-butynyl, and the like.
  • The term “aryl” refers to an aromatic ring or heteroaromatic ring and includes such groups as furyl, pyrrolyl, thienyl, pyridinyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, phenyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, naphthyl, indanyl, fluorenyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzodioxanyl, benzofuranyl, benzothienyl, and the like.
  • The term “optionally-substituted” refers to the replacement of one or more, preferably from one to three, hydrogen atoms with one or more substitutents. Such substituents include such groups as C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylthio, hydroxy, nitro, halo, carboxy, cyano, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C1-C4 haloalkoxy, amino, carboxamido, amino, mono(C1-C4 alkyl)amino, di(C1-C4 alkyl)amino, C1-C4 alkylsulfonylamino, and the like.
  • The term “heterocycle” refers to a saturated cyclic structure possessing one or more heteroatoms, such as nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, and the like, and includes such groups as tetrahydrofuryl, morpholinyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, homopiperazinyl, quinuclidinyl, and the like.
  • The term “alkoxy” includes such groups as methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, butoxy, tert-butoxy and the like.
  • The terms “acyl” and “alkanoyl” include such groups as formyl, acetyl, propanoyl, butanoyl, pentanoyl and the like.
  • The term “halo” means fluoro, chloro, bromo, and iodo.
  • The term “alkanoyloxy” includes such groups as formyloxy, acetoxy, n-propionoxy, n-butyroxy, pivaloyloxy, and like lower alkanoyloxy groups.
  • The terms “optionally-substituted C1-C4 alkyl” and “optionally-substituted C2-C4 alkenyl” are taken to mean an alkyl or alkenyl chain which is optionally substituted with up to two methyl groups or with a C1-C4 alkoxycarbonyl group.
  • The term “(C1-C4 alkyl)” as used in for example “aryl(C1-C4 alkyl)”, “(C1-C4 alkoxy)-(C1-C4 alkyl)”, and the like, refers to a saturated linear or branched divalent alkyl chain of from one to four carbons bearing for example aryl, C1-C4 alkoxy, and the like, as a substituent and includes such groups as for example benzyl, phenethyl, phenpropyl, α-methylbenzyl, methoxymethyl, ethoxyethyl, and the like.
  • The term “optionally-substituted phenyl” is taken to mean a phenyl radical optionally substituted with one or two substituents independently selected from the group consisting of C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, hydroxy, halo, nitro, trifluoromethyl, sulfonamido, cyano, carbamoyl, amino, mono(C1-C4 alkyl)amino, di(C1-C4 alkyl)amino, C1-C4 alkylsulfonylamino, and indol-2-yl.
  • The term “protected amino” refers to amine protecting groups used to protect the nitrogen of the β-lactam, ring during preparation or subsequent reactions. Examples of such groups are benzyl, 4-methoxybenzyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, or trialkylsilyl, for example trimethylsilyl.
  • The term “protected carboxy” refers to the carboxy group protected or blocked by a conventional protecting group commonly used for the temporary blocking of the acidic carboxy. Examples of such groups include lower alkyl, for example tert-butyl, halo-substituted lower alkyl, for example 2-iodoethyl and 2,2,2-trichloroethyl, benzyl and substituted benzyl, for example 4-methoxybenzyl and 4-nitrobenzyl, diphenylmethyl, alkenyl, for example allyl, trialkylsilyl, for example trimethylsilyl and tert-butyldiethylsilyl and like carboxy-protecting groups.
  • The term “antagonist”, as it is used in the description of this invention, is taken to mean a full or partial antagonist. A compound which is a partial antagonist at the vasopressin V1a receptor must exhibit sufficient antagonist activity to inhibit the effects of vasopressin or a vasopressin agonist at an acceptable dose. While a partial antagonist of any intrinsic activity may be useful, partial antagonists of at least about 50% antagonist effect are preferred and partial antagonists of at least about 80% antagonist effect are more preferred. Full antagonists of the vasopressin V1a receptor are most preferred.
    • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
  • Certain classes of compounds of the present invention having formula I or formula II are preferred. Illustrative classes of such compounds are described in the following paragraphs.
  • A class of compounds having formula I, wherein:
  • (aa) A is R6O—;
  • (ab) R6 is C1-C6 alkyl;
  • (ac) R6 is optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl);
  • (ad) A is a monosubstituted amino of the formula XNH—;
  • (ae) A is a disubstituted amino having the formula R5XN—;
  • (af) A′ is a monosubstituted amino having the formula X′NH—;
  • (ag) A′ is a disubstituted amino having the formula R5′XN—;
  • (ah) A′ is R6′O—;
  • (ai) R6′ is C1-C6 alkyl;
  • (aj) R6′ is optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl);
  • (ak) X is optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl);
  • (al) X is R7R8N—(C1-C4 alkyl);
  • (am) R7 and R8 are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle;
  • (an) R5 and X are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle;
  • (ao) the heterocycle is optionally substituted with an optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), the first heterocycle Y, or C3-C8 cycloalkyl;
  • (ap) R2 is hydrogen;
  • (aq) R2 is C1-C6 alkyl;
  • (ar) R2 is C1-C2 alkyl;
  • (as) R3 is 4-substituted oxazolidin-2-on-3-yl;
  • (at) R3 is 4,5-disubstituted oxazolidin-2-on-3-yl;
  • (au) R3 is 2-substituted oxazolidin-4-on-3-yl;
  • (av) R3 is 2-substituted imidazolidin-4-on-3-yl;
  • (aw) R3 is 1,2-disubstituted imidazolidin-4-on-3-yl;
  • (ax) R3 is 5-substituted imidazolidin-2-on-1-yl;
  • (ay) R3 is 4,5-disubstituted imidazolidin-4-on-1-yl;
  • (az) R4 is optionally-substituted 2-aryleth-1-yl;
  • (ba) R4 is optionally-substituted 2-arylethen-1-yl;
  • (bb) R5 is benzyl;
  • (bc) X′ is the heterocycle Y;
  • (bd) X is optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl);
  • (be) aryl is optionally-substituted phenyl;
  • (bf) X′ is R7R8N—(C1-C4 alkyl);
  • (bg) X′ is R7′R8′N—;
  • (bh) R7 is C1-C6 alkyl;
  • (bi) R8 is C1-C6 alkyl;
  • (bj) R7 and R8 are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle;
  • (bk) R7 and R8 are the same and are C1-C6 alkyl;
  • (bl) R5′ and X′ taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached form pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl; where said pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, or piperazinyl is optionally substituted with the second heterocycle Y′ or with R7R8N—(C1-C4 alkyl);
  • (bm) R5′ and X′ taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached form piperidinyl optionally substituted at the 4-position with hydroxy, C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, (C1-C4 alkoxy)carbonyl, (hydroxy(C1-C4 alkyloxy))—(C1-C4 alkyl), R7R8N—, R7R8N—(C1-C4 alkyl), phenyl, phenyl(C1-C4 alkyl), optionally-substituted phenyl(C1-C4 alkyl), furyl(C1-C4 alkyl), pyridinyl(C1-C4 alkyl), thienyl(C1-C4 alkyl), or piperidin-1-yl(C1-C4 alkyl),
  • (bn) R5′ and X′ taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached form piperazinyl optionally substituted at the 4-position with C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, optionally-substituted phenyl, optionally-substituted phenyl(C1-C4 alkyl), N—(C1-C5 alkyl)acetamid-2-yl, N—(C3-C8 cycloalkyl)acetamid-2-yl, R7R8N—, or (C1-C4 alkoxy)carbonyl; and
  • (bo) R5′ and X′ taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached form homopiperazinyl optionally substituted in the 4-position with C1-C4 alkyl, phenyl, or phenyl(C1-C4 alkyl).
  • It is appreciated that the classes of compounds described above may be combined to form additional illustrative classes. An example of such a combination of classes may be a class of compounds wherein A is a monosubstituted amino having the formula XNH—, where X is optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), and A′ is a disubstituted amino having the formula R5′X′N—, where R5′ and X′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle, such as piperidine, peperazine, and the like. Further combinations of the classes of compounds described above are contemplated in the present invention.
  • Further illustrative classes of compounds are described by compounds having formula III:
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00007
    wherein:
  • Ar is optionally-substituted phenyl, optionally-substituted pyridinyl, optionally-substituted furyl, or optionally-substituted thienyl;
  • R2 is hydrogen;
  • A is XNH—;
  • A′ is X′NH—;
  • A′ is R5′XN—;
  • n is 0, 1, or 2;
  • X is optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), and aryl is substituted phenyl;
  • A′ is R6′O—;
  • R6′ is C1-C6 alkyl;
  • X′ is R7′R8′N—;
  • X′ is optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl);
  • X′ is the second heterocycle Y′;
  • R5′ and X′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form piperidinyl, piperazinyl, or homopiperazinyl; where said piperidinyl, piperazinyl, or homopiperazinyl is optionally substituted with C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, the second heterocycle Y′, optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), R7R8N—, R7R8N—(C1-C4 alkyl), or R7R8N—C(O)—(C1-C4 alkyl);
  • R8′ is C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, optionally-substituted aryl, optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl); and
  • R7′ and R8′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, and piperazinyl; where said piperazinyl is optionally substituted at the 4-position with C1-C4 alkyl.
  • Further illustrative classes of compounds are described by compounds having formula IV:
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00008
    wherein:
  • Ar is optionally-substituted phenyl, optionally-substituted pyridinyl, optionally-substituted furyl, or optionally-substituted thienyl;
  • R2 is hydrogen;
  • A is XNH—;
  • n′ is 1, 2, or 3;
  • X is optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl), and aryl is substituted phenyl;
  • R6′ is
  • R8′ is C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, optionally-substituted aryl, optionally-substituted aryl(C1-C4 alkyl); and
  • R7′ and R8′ are taken together with the attached nitrogen atom to form an heterocycle selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, and piperazinyl; where said piperazinyl is optionally substituted at the 4-position with C1-C4 alkyl.
  • The following Tables 1-5 are illustrative of compounds contemplated to be within the scope of the present invention.
    TABLE 1
    2-[3-(Oxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)azetidinon-1-yl]alkanedioic acid derivatives.
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00009
    n R2 R10 R11 A A′ Ar
    0 H benzofur- 3-iodophenyl 2-(piperidin-1-yl)ethylamino 4-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)piperazin- fur-3-yl
    2-yl 1-yl
    0 methyl benzofur- 4-fluorophenyl 4-(piperidin-1-yl)piperidin- 4-(3-trifluorophenyl)piperazin- pyrrol-2-yl
    7-yl 1-yl 1-yl
    0 ethyl benzothien- 4-cyanophenyl 4-(phenylethyl)piperazin- 4-(benzyloxycarbonyl)piperazin- pyrrol-3-yl
    5-yl 1-yl 1-yl
    1 methyl benzothien- phenyl fur-2-ylmethylamino 4-[2-(2-hydroxyethoxy)ethyl] pyridin-2-yl
    3-yl piperazin-1-yl
    1 H thien-2-yl methoxycarbonyl 4-(3-trifluoromethylphenyl) 4-(3,4-methylenedioxybenzyl) pyridin-4-yl
    piperazin-1-yl piperazin-1-yl
    1 H naphth-2-yl 4-ethylaminophenyl 4-(benzyloxycarbonyl) 4-phenylpiperazin-1-yl thiazol-2-yl
    piperazin-1-yl
    2 methyl 3-phenyprop- 2-isobutoxycarbonyl 4-[2-(2-hydroxyethoxy)ethyl] 4-(3-phenylprop-2-enyl) thiazol-4-yl
    1-yl piperazin-1-yl piperazin-1-yl
    2 ethyl 2-pheneth- 2-methanesulfonyl- 4-benzylpiperazin-1-yl 4-ethylpiperazin-1-yl thiazol-5-yl
    1-yl aminophenyl
    2 methyl 3-isopropyl- cyclohexyl 4-(3,4-methylenedioxybenzyl) 2-(dimethylamino)ethylamino oxazol-2-yl
    benzyl piperazin-1-yl
  • TABLE 2
    2-[3-(Oxazolidin-4-on-3-yl)azetidinon-1-yl]alkanedioic acid derivatives.
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00010
    n R2 R10 A A′ Ar
    0 ethyl 4-fluorobenzyl 4-phenylpiperazin- 4-(pyrrolidin-1-ylcarbonylmethyl) oxazol-4-yl
    1-yl piperazin-1-yl
    0 H benzyl 4-(3-phenylprop-2-enyl) 4-(1-methylpiperidin-4-yl) oxazol-5-yl
    piperazin-1-yl piperazin-1-yl
    0 methyl 4-methoxyphenyl 4-ethylpiperazin-1-yl 4-butylpiperazin-1-yl isoxazol-3-yl
    1 H 3-chlorophenyl 2-(dimethylamino)ethylamino 4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl isoxazol-4-yl
    1 methyl 2-ethylphenyl 4-(pyrrolidin-1-ylcarbonylmethyl) 2-(piperidin-1-yl)ethylamino isoxazol-5-yl
    piperazin-1-yl
    1 ethyl phenyl 4-(1-methylpiperidin-4-yl) 4-(2-phenylethyl)piperazin-1-yl imidazol-2-yl
    piperazin-1-yl
    1 methyl cyclopropyl 4-butylpiperazin-1-yl 4-(piperidin-1-yl)piperidin-1-yl imidazol-4-yl
    2 H cyclobutyl 4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl 2-(pyridin-2-yl)ethylamino imidazol-5-yl
    2 H cyclopentyl 4-pyridylmethylamino morpholin-4-ylamino pyrazol-3-yl
    2 H cyclohexyl 3-(dimethylamino)propylamino 4-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)piperazin-1-yl pyrazol-4-yl
  • TABLE 3
    2-[3-(Succinimid-1-yl)azetidinon-1-yl]alkanedioic acid derivatives.
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00011
    n R2 R11 A A′ Ar
    0 H naphth-2-yl 1-benzylpiperidin-4-ylamino 4-(3-trifluorophenyl)piperazin- pyrazol-5-yl
    1-yl
    0 ethyl propyl N-benzyl-2-(dimethylamino) 4-(benzyloxycarbonyl)piperazin- pyrimidin-2-yl
    ethylamino 1-yl
    0 methyl 3-chloronaphth- 3-pyridylmethylamino 4-[2-(2-hydroxyethoxy)ethyl] pyrimidin-4-yl
    1-yl piperazin-1-yl
    1 ethyl ethyl 4-(cyclohexyl)piperazin-1-yl 4-benzylpiperazin-1-yl Pyrimidin-5-yl
    1 H 6-methoxynaphth- 4-(2-cyclohexylethyl)piperazin- 4-(3,4-methylenedioxybenzyl) Thiadiazol-3-yl
    2-yl 1-yl piperazin-1-yl
    1 methyl methyl 4-[2-(morpholin-4-yl)ethyl] 4-phenylpiperazin-1-yl Oxadiazol-3-yl
    piperazin-1-yl
    1 H 5-aminonaphth- 4-(4-tert-butylbenzyl)piperazin- 4-(3-phenylprop-2-enyl) Quinolin-2-yl
    1-yl 1-yl piperazin-1-yl
    2 methyl ethoxycarbonyl 4-[2-(piperidin-1-yl)ethyl] 4-ethylpiperazin-1-yl Quinolin-3-yl
    piperazin-1-yl
    2 ethyl isopropyl 4-[3-(piperidin-1-yl)propyl] 2-(dimethylamino)ethylamino Quinolin-4-yl
    piperazin-1-yl
    2 methyl tert-butoxycarbonyl 4-[2-(N,N-dipropylamino)ethyl] 4-(pyrrolidin-1-ylcarbonylmethyl) Isoquinolin-1-yl
    piperazin-1-yl piperazin-1-yl
  • TABLE 4
    2-[3-(Imidazol-2-on-1-yl)azetidinon-1-yl]alkanedioic acid derivatives.
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00012
    n R2 R10 R11 R12 A A′ Ar
    0 H 3-nitrophenyl propyl tert-butoxycarbonyl 4-[3-(N,N-diethylamino)propyl] 4-(1-methylpiperidin-4-yl) naphth-1-yl
    piperazin-1-yl piperazin-1-yl
    0 ethyl 3-(thiobenzyl) naphth-1-yl benzyloxycarbonyl 4-[2-(dimethlamino)ethyl] 4-butylpiperazin-1-yl naphth-2-yl
    prop-1-yl piperazin-1-yl
    0 methyl Phenoxy- ethyl H 4-[3-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)propyl] 4-isopropylpiperazin- 2-fluorophenyl
    carbonyl piperazin-1-yl 1-yl
    1 methyl 2-methoxy- naphth-2-yl 4-isopropylbenzyl- 4-(cyclohexylmethyl)piperazin- 4-pyridylmethylamino 3-chlorophenyl
    carbonyl-ethyl oxycarbonyl 1-yl
    1 ethyl 4-methane- methyl 3-methoxybenzyl- 4-cyclopentylpiperazin- 3-(dimethylamino) 4-bromophenyl
    sulfonyl-phenyl oxycarbonyl 1-yl propylamino
    1 H Isopropyl 2-chloro- 2-butoxybenzyl- 4-[2-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)ethyl] 3-benzylpiperidin- 2-methylphenyl
    naphth-1-yl oxycarbonyl piperazin-1-yl 4-ylamino
    1 ethyl 3-aminophenyl 6-methoxy- 3-chlorobenzyl- 4-[2-(thien-2-yl)ethyl] N-benzyl-2-(dimethylamino) 3-isopropylphenyl
    naphth-2-yl oxycarbonyl piperazin-1-yl ethylamino
    2 H 2-cyanophenyl isobutyl 3-fluoro-5-methoxy- 4-(3-phenylpropyl)piperazin- 3-pyridylmethylamino 2-propoxyphenyl
    benzyloxycarbonyl 1-yl
    2 methyl 3-methylthio- 5-amino- 3-cyanobenzyl- 4-[2-(N,N-diethylamino)ethyl] 4-cyclohexylpiperazin- 3-methoxyphenyl
    butyl naphth-1-yl oxycarbonyl piperazin-1-yl 1-yl
    2 H 4-hydroxy- butyl methyl 4-benzylhomopiperazin- 4-(2-cyclohexylethyl) 2-ethylthiophenyl
    phenyl 1-yl piperazin-1-yl
  • TABLE 5
    2-[3-(Imidazol-5-on-1-yl)azetidinon-1-yl]alkanedioic acid derivatives.
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00013
    n R2 R10 R12 A A′ Ar
    0 methyl 2-fluoro-4- 3-aminobenzyl- 4-(bisphenylmethyl) 4-[2-(morpholin-4-yl)ethyl] 4-methylthio-
    methoxyphenyl oxycarbonyl piperazin-1-yl piperazin-1-yl phenyl
    0 ethyl 3-ethoxyphenyl 2-hydroxybenzyl- 3-(4-methylpiperazin-1-yl) 4-(4-tert-butylbenzyl) 2-nitrophenyl
    oxycarbonyl propylamino piperazin-1-yl
    0 methyl 2-methylphenyl 3-ethylaminobenzyl- (+)-3(S)-1-benzyl- 4-[2-(piperidin-1-yl)ethyl] 2-carboxyphenyl
    oxycarbonyl pyrrolidin-3-ylamino piperazin-1-yl
    1 H 2-methoxyphenyl 4-dimethylamino- 2-pyridylmethylamino 4-[3-(piperidin-1-yl)propyl] 3-carboxamido-
    benzyloxycarbonyl piperazin-1-yl phenyl
    1 H 3-ethoxyphenyl methyl 4-ethylpiperazin-1-yl 4-[2-(diisopropylamino)ethyl] 2,3-difluoro-
    piperazin-1-yl phenyl
    1 H 3-isopropylphenyl benzyl 2-(dimethylamino)ethylamino 4-[3-(diethylamino)propyl] 3,5-dichloro-
    piperazin-1-yl phenyl
    1 H 4-chlorophenyl isopropoxycarbonyl 4-(pyrrolidin-1- 4-(2-dimethylaminoethyl) 3-chloro-4-
    ylcarbonylmethyl)piperazin- piperazin-1-yl bromophenyl
    1-yl
    2 ethyl 2-chloro-4- propoxycarbonyl 4-(1-methylpiperidin- 4-[3-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)propyl] 5,6-dichloro-
    bromophenyl 4-yl)piperazin-1-yl piperazin-1-yl 3-iodophenyl
    2 H 2-ethyl-3- ethoxycarbonyl 4-butylpiperazin-1-yl 4-(cyclohexylmethyl) 2,4-dimethyl-
    bromophenyl piperazin-1-yl phenyl
    2 ethyl 2-chloro-4- methoxycarbonyl 4-isopropyl0piperazin- 4-(2- 3-methyl-4-
    bromophenyl 1-yl dimethylaminoethyl) isopropoxyphenyl
    piperazin-1-yl
  • The compounds of the present invention are comprised of an azetidinone nucleus, said nucleus bearing asymmetric carbons at the 3- and 4-positions as illustrated by following structures:
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00014
    The compounds of the invention may, therefore, exist as single diastereomers, mixtures of diastereomers, or as a racemic mixture, all of which are useful and part of the invention. It is preferred that the azetidinone nucleus of the compounds of the invention exist in a single diastereomeric form. It is most preferred that the azetidinone nucleus exist as the (3S,4R)-diastereomer.
  • It is appreciated that, except when A=A′ and n=0, the carbon bearing R2 is also asymmetric. Furthermore, when R3 is 4-substituted oxazolidin-2-on-3-yl, the 4-position of that ring is asymmetric. In addition, when R3 is 2,5-disubstituted oxazolidin-4-on-3-yl or 1,2,5-trisubstituted imidazolidin-4-on-3-yl, the 2- and 5-carbons of those rings are asymmetric. Finally, when R3 is succinimido and one of R14 and R15 is hydrogen, the carbon bearing the non-hydrogen substituent is also asymmetric. While compounds possessing all combinations of stereochemical purity are contemplated by the present invention, it is appreciated that in many cases at least one of these chiral centers described above may be present in a single absolute configuration.
  • The compounds of this invention are useful in methods for antagonism of the vasopressin V1a receptor. Such antagonism is useful in treating a variety of disorders that have been linked to this receptor in mammals. It is preferred that the mammal to be treated by the administration of compounds of this invention is human.
  • Since certain of the compounds of this invention are amines, they are basic in nature and accordingly react with any of a number of inorganic and organic acids to form pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts. Because some of the free amines of the compounds of this invention are typically oils at room temperature, it is preferable to convert the free amines to their pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts for ease of handling and administration, since the latter are routinely solid at room temperature. Acids commonly employed to form such salts are inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, hydroiodic acid, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like, and organic acids, such as p-toluenesulfonic acid, methanesulfonic acid, oxalic acid, p-bromophenylsulfonic acid, carbonic acid, succinic acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, acetic acid, and the like. Examples of such pharmaceutically acceptable salts thus are the sulfate, pyrosulfate, bisulfate, sulfite, bisulfite, phosphate, monohydrogenphosphate, dihydrogenphosphate, metaphosphate, pyrophosphate, chloride, bromide, iodide, acetate, propionate, decanoate, caprylate, acrylate, formate, isobutyrate, caproate, heptanoate, propiolate, oxalate, malonate, succinate, suberate, sebacate, fumarate, maleate, butyne-1,4-dioate, hexyne-1,6-dioate, benzoate, chlorobenzoate, methylbenzoate, dinitrobenzoate, hydroxybenzoate, methoxybenzoate, phthalate, sulfonate, xylenesulfonate, phenylacetate, phenylpropionate, phenylbutyrate, citrate, lactate, β-hydroxybutyrate, glycollate, tartrate, methanesulfonate, propanesulfonate, naphthalene-1-sulfonate, naphthalene-2-sulfonate, mandelate and the like. Preferred pharmaceutically acceptable salts are those formed with hydrochloric acid, trifluoroacetic acid, maleic acid or fumaric acid.
  • The 2-(azetidinon-1-yl)alkanedioic acid esters and amides of formulae I and II are prepared by syntheses well known in the art. As illustrated for compounds of formula I, the 2-(azetidinon-1-yl)alkanedioic acid esters are obtainable by the 2+2 cycloaddition of an appropriately substituted acetic acid derivative (i), and an imine ester (ii) as described in Synthetic Scheme I, where Z is a leaving group, and the integer n, and the moieties A, A′, R2, R3, and R4 are as previously described. The term “leaving group” as used hereinafter refers to a substitutent, such as halo, acyloxy, benzoyloxy and the like, present on an activated carbon atom that may be replaced by a nucleophile. The chemistry described in Synthetic Scheme I is applicable to imines (ii) bearing ester, thioester, or amide moieties.
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00015
    The preparation of the appropriate imines (ii) and most of the required acetyl halides or anhydrides (i), as well as the cycloaddition procedure, are generally described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,665,171 and 4,751,299, hereby incorporated by reference. The analogous synthesis of compounds of formula II may be accomplished by this process using the appropriate alkoxy-substituted amino acid imines.
  • Those compounds of formulae I and II of the invention requiring R3 to be 4-substituted oxazolidin-2-on-3-yl or 1,4,5-trisubstituted imidazolidin-2-on-3-yl are prepared from the corresponding (4-substituted oxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)- or (1,4,5-trisubstituted imidazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-acetyl halide or anhydride. The acid halide or anhydride is available from an appropriately substituted glycine. The glycine is first converted to the carbamate and then reduced to provide the corresponding alcohol. The alcohol is then cyclized to the 4-substituted oxazolidin-2-one, which is subsequently N-alkylated with a haloacetic acid ester. The ester is hydrolyzed, and the resulting acid is converted to the acetyl halide or anhydride (i).
  • Those compounds of the invention requiring R3 to be 2,5-disubstituted oxazolidin-4-on-3-yl or 1,2,5-trisubstituted imidazolidin-4-on-3-yl are prepared from the corresponding (2,5-disubstituted oxazolidin-4-on-3-yl)- or (1,2,5-trisubstituted imidazolidin-4-on-3-yl)acetyl chlorides or anhydrides respectively. The chemistry to prepare these reagents is described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,772,694, hereby incorporated by reference. Briefly, the required oxazolidinone or imidazolidinone is obtained from an x-hydroxyacid or an α-aminoacid, respectively. The imidazolones are prepared by converting the α-aminoacid, (R11)—CH(NH2)CO2H, to an amino-protected amide and then condensing the amide with an aldehyde, (R10)—CHO, in the presence of an acid to form the 3-protected imidazolidin-4-one, where R10 and R11 are as defined above. The 1-position may be functionalized with an appropriate reagent to introduce R12 and the 3-position deprotected, where R12 is as defined above. The imidazolidin-4-one ring is then alkylated with a haloacetic acid ester, the ester deesterified, and the resulting acetic acid converted to the desired acid halide or anhydride (i). The required oxazolidinones are prepared in an analogous manner from the corresponding α-hydroxyacid, (R11)—CH(OH)CO2H.
  • Those compounds of the invention requiring R3 to be succinimido are prepared from the corresponding 2-(succinimido)acetyl halide or anhydride. The chemistry to prepare these reagents is described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,734,498, hereby incorporated by reference. Briefly, these reagents are obtained from tartaric acid or, when one of R10 and R11 is hydrogen, from malic acid. Tartaric acid is acylated or O-alkylated, the corresponding diacyl or di-O-alkyl tartaric acid is treated with an acid anhydride to form the succinic anhydride, and reaction of this succinic anhydride with an ester of glycine to form first the noncyclic half amide ester which is then cyclized to the 3,4-disubstituted succinimidoacetic acid ester. The ester group is deesterified and the resulting acid converted to the corresponding acid halide or anhydride (i). The mono-substituted succinimidoacetyl halide or anhydride is obtained with malic acid V1a succinic anhydride formation followed by succinimide formation as described above.
  • Those compounds of the invention requiring R3 to be an N-substituted amine or an N′-substituted urea may be prepared from the corresponding phthalimido protected 3-amino analogs. The phthalimide protecting group may be removed using conventional procedures, such as by treatment with hydrazine, and the like. Once liberated, the amine may be alkylated with any one of a variety of alkyl and cycloalkyl halides and sulfates, such as methyl iodide, isopropylbromide, diethyl sulfate, cyclopropylmethylbromide, cyclopentyliodide, and the like. Such amines may also be acylated with acid halides, acid anhydrides, isocyanates, isothiocyanates, such as acetyl chloride, propionic anhydride, methylisocyanate, 3-trifluoromethylphenylisothiocyanate, and the like.
  • The bases to be used in Synthetic Scheme I include, among others, aliphatic tertiary amines, such as trimethylamine and triethylamine, cyclic tertiary amines, such as N-methylpiperidine and N-methylmorpholine, aromatic amines, such as pyridine and lutidine, and other organic bases such as 1,8-diazabicyclo[5,4,0]undec-7-ene (DBU).
  • The solvents useful for reactions described in Synthetic Scheme I include, among others, dioxane, tetrahydrofuran, diethyl ether, ethyl acetate, dichloromethane, chloroform, carbon tetrachloride, benzene, toluene, acetonitrile, dimethyl sulfoxide and N,N-dimethylformamide.
  • Alternatively, the compounds of formulae I and II may be prepared V1a N—C(4) cyclization, as illustrated for compounds of formula I in Synthetic Scheme II, via cyclization of β-hydroxy amides iii, where R2, R3, R4, A, and A′ are as defined previously, according to the procedure of Townsend and Nguyen in J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1981, 103, 4582, and Miller and Mattingly in Tetra. 1983, 39, 2563, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. The analogous synthesis of compounds of formula II may be accomplished by cyclization of β-hydroxy amides of alkoxy-substituted amino acids.
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00016
  • The azetidinone ring may also be prepared with a deficit of substituents R3, R4, or the R2-substituted N-alkanedioic acid or alkoxyalkanoic acid moiety, but possessing substituents capable of being elaborated through subsequent chemical transformation to such groups described for compounds of formulae I and II. In general, azetidinones may be prepared V1a N—C(4) cyclization, such as the cyclization of acylhydroxamates iv to azetidinone intermediates v, as depicted in Scheme III, where R2, R3, R4, A, and A′ are as defined above, according to the procedure of Mattingly et al. in J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1979, 101, 3983 and Accts. Chem. Res. 1986, 19, 49, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. It is appreciated that other hydroxamates, such as alkylhydroxamates, aryl hydroxamates, and the like, are suitable for carrying out the cyclization.
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00017
    Subsequent chemical transformation of the acyloxyazetidinone v to introduce for example an R2-substituted alkanedioic acid moiety using conventional procedures will illustratively provide compounds of formula I. The analogous synthesis of compounds of formula II may be accomplished by this process using an appropriate R2-substituted alkoxyalkanoic acid.
  • An alternative cyclization to form intermediate azetidinones, which may be further elaborated to compounds of formulae I and II, may occur by oxidative cyclization of acylhydroxamates vi to intermediate azetidinones vii, as illustrated in Synthetic Scheme IV, where R3 is as defined above, according to the procedure of Rajendra and Miller in J. Org. Chem. 1987, 52, 4471 and Tetrahedron Lett. 1985, 26, 5385, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. The group R in Scheme IV represents an alkyl or aryl moiety selected to provide R4, as defined above, upon subsequent transformation. For example, R may be the group PhCH2—, as in vii-a, such that oxidative elimination of HBr will provide the desired R4, a styryl group, as in vii-b. It is appreciated that elaboration of R to R4 is not necessarily performed immediately subsequent to the cyclization and may be performed conveniently after other steps in the synthesis of compounds of formulae I and II. It is further appreciated that alternatives to the acylhydroxamates shown, such as alkylhydroxamates, aryl hydroxamates, and the like, are suitable for carrying out the cyclization.
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00018
  • Other useful intermediates, such as the azetidinone-4-carboxaldehyde viii illustrated in Synthetic Scheme V for preparing for example compounds of formula I, may be further elaborated to 4-(R4)-substituted azetidinones V1a an olefination reaction. The group R in Scheme V is selected such that upon successful olefination of the carboxaldehyde the resulting group R—CHCH— corresponds to the desired alkyl or aryl moiety R4, as defined above. Such olefination reactions may be accomplished by any of the variety of known procedures, such as by Wittig olefination, Peterson olefination, and the like. Synthetic Scheme V illustrates the corresponding Wittig olefination with phosphorane ix. The analogous synthesis of compounds of formula II may be accomplished by this process using an appropriate alkoxy-substituted azetidinone-4-carboxaldehyde derivative.
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00019
  • Still other useful intermediates, such as the azetidinonyl acetic acid derivatives x, may be converted into compounds of formulae I and II, as illustrated for the synthesis of compounds of formula I in Synthetic Scheme VI. Introduction of an R2 moiety, and a carboxylic acid derivative A′-C(O)—(CH2)n— for compounds of formula I, or an alkoxyalkanoic acid derivative R6′—(CH2)n— for compounds of formula II, may be accomplished by alkylation of the anion of x, where the integers n and n′, and the groups R2, R3, R4, R6, A, and A′ are as defined above.
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00020
    Acetic acid derivative x is deprotonated and subsequently alkylated with an alkyl halide corresponding to R2-Z, where Z is a leaving group, to provide intermediate xi. Illustratively, the anion of xi may be alkylated with a compound Z′-(CH2)nCOA′, where Z′ is a leaving group, to provide compounds of formula I. It is appreciated that the order of introduction of either the substituent R2 or the acid derivative —(CH2)nCOA′, or the alkoxyalkanoic acid derivative —(CH2)n′OR6′, is conveniently chosen by the skilled artisan and such order of introduction may be different for each compound of formula I or formula II.
  • A solution of the 2-(3,4-disubstituted azetidin-2-on-1-yl)acetic acid derivative x or xi in an appropriate solvent, such as tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, or diethyl ether, is treated with a non-nucleophilic base to generate the anion of x or xi, respectively. Suitable bases for this transformation include lithium diisopropylamide, lithium 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidinamide, or lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide. The anion is then quenched with an appropriate electrophile to provide the desired compounds. Illustrative electrophiles represented by the formulae R2-Z, R5XN—C(O)—(CH2)n-Z, or R6′O—C(O)—(CH2)n-Z provide the corresponding compounds xi or I, respectively. The analogous synthesis of compounds of formula II may be accomplished by this process by using an electrophile represented by the formula R6′O—(CH2)n-Z.
  • As discussed above, the compounds prepared as described in Synthetic Schemes I, II, IV, I, V, and VI may be pure diastereomers, mixtures of diastereomers, or racemates. The actual stereochemical composition of the compound will be dictated by the specific reaction conditions, combination of substituents, and stereochemistry of the reactants employed. It is appreciated that diasteromeric mixtures may be separated by chromatography or fractional crystallization to provide single diastereomers if desired. Particularly, the reactions described in Synthetic Schemes III, IV, and VI create a new chiral center at the carbon bearing R2, except when n=0 and A=A′.
  • Compounds of formula I which are 2-(3,4-disubstituted azetidin-2-on-1-yl)alkanedioic acid half-esters, such as compounds I-a where A′ is R6′O—, while useful vasopressin V1a agents in their own right, may also be converted to the corresponding half-carboxylic acids xii, where the integer n and the groups R2, R3, R4, R5, R6′, A, and X′ are as previously defined, as illustrated in Synthetic Scheme VII. These intermediates are useful for the preparation of other compounds of the invention, such as I-b where A′ is R5′X′N—. It is appreciated that the transformation illustrated in Synthetic Scheme VII is equally applicable for the preparation of compounds I where A′ is X′NH— or where a different R6′O— is desired.
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00021
  • The requisite carboxylic acid xii may be prepared from the corresponding ester V1a saponification under standard conditions by treatment with hydroxide followed by protonation of the resultant carboxylate anion. Where R6′ is tert-butyl, the ester I-a may be dealkylated by treatment with trifluoroacetic acid. Where R6′ is benzyl, the ester I-a may be dealkylated either by subjection to mild hydrogenolysis conditions, or by reaction with elemental sodium or lithium in liquid ammonia. Finally, where R6′ is 2-(trimethylsilyl)ethyl, the ester I-a may be deprotected and converted into the corresponding acid xii by treatment with a source of fluoride ion, such as tetrabutylammonium fluoride. The choice of conditions is dependent upon the nature of the R6′ moiety and the compatibility of other functionality in the molecule with the reaction conditions.
  • The carboxylic acid xii is converted to the corresponding amide I-b under standard conditions well recognized in the art. The acid may be first converted to the corresponding acid halide, preferably the chloride or fluoride, followed by treatment with an appropriate primary or secondary amine to provide the corresponding amide. Alternatively, the acid may be converted under standard conditions to a mixed anhydride. This is typically accomplished by first treating the carboxylic acid with an amine, such as triethylamine, to provide the corresponding carboxylate anion. This carboxylate is then reacted with a suitable haloformate, for example benzyl chloroformate, ethyl chloroformate or isobutylchloroformate, to provide the corresponding mixed anhydride. This anhydride may then be treated with an appropriate primary or secondary amine to provide the desired amide. Finally, the carboxylic acid may be treated with a typical peptide coupling reagent such as N,N′-carbonyldiimidazole (CDI), N,N′-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC) and 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (EDC), followed by the appropriate amine of formula R5XNH. A polymer-supported form of EDC has been described in Tetrahedron Letters, 34(48), 7685 (1993), the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference, and is very useful for the preparation of the compounds of the present invention. It is appreciated that substituting an appropriate amine with an appropriate alcohol in the synthetic scheme presented above will provide the esters of the invention, e.g. analogs of I-a with a different ester R6′O—.
  • The carboxylic acid may alternatively be converted into the corresponding tert-butyl ester V1a treatment of the acid with an acid catalyst, such as concentrated sulfuric acid, and the like, and with isobutylene in a suitable solvent, such as dioxane, and the like. The reaction is preferably carried out under pressure in an appropriate vessel, such as a pressure bottle, and the like. Reaction times of about 18 hours are not uncommon. The desired ester may be isolated from the organic layer after partitioning the reaction mixture between a suitable organic solvent, such as ethyl acetate, and the like, and a basic aqueous layer, such as cold 1N sodium hydroxide, and the like.
  • It is appreciated that the transformation illustrated in Synthetic Scheme VII may also be used to convert in an analogous fashion, the half-ester I where A is R6O— to the corresponding acid and subsequently into derivatives I where A is XNH—, R5XN—, or a different R6O—. Finally, it is appreciated that the transformation in Synthetic Scheme VII may also be used to convert in an analogous fashion the esters of formula II, where A is R6O—, to the corresponding acids, and subsequently into derivatives of formula II, where A is XNH—, R5XN—, or a different R6O—.
  • Compounds of formulae I and II where R4 includes an ethenyl or ethynyl spacer, such as for example, compounds I-c and I-d, respectively, may be converted into the corresponding arylethyl derivatives, compounds I-e, V1a reduction, as illustrated for compounds of formula I in Synthetic Scheme VIII. Conversion is accomplished by catalytic hydrogenation, and other like reductions, where the integer n and the groups R2, R3, A, and A′ are as previously defined. The corresponding compounds of formula II may also be converted from ethylene and ethene precursors in an analogous fashion. The moiety R depicted in Scheme VIII is chosen such that the substituent R—CC—, R—CHCH—, or R—CH2CH2— corresponds to the desired R4 of formulae I or II as defined above.
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00022
    The hydrogenation of the triple or double bond proceeds readily over a precious metal catalyst, such as palladium on carbon. The hydrogenation solvent may consist of a lower alkanol, such as methanol or ethanol, tetrahydrofuran, or a mixed solvent system of tetrahydrofuran and ethyl acetate. The hydrogenation may be performed at an initial hydrogen pressure of about 20-80 p.s.i., preferably about 50-60 p.s.i., at a temperature of about 0-60° C., preferably within the range of from ambient temperature to about 40° C., for about 1 hour to about 3 days.
  • Alternatively, the ethynyl spacer of compound I-c may be selectively reduced to the ethenyl spacer of compound I-d using poisoned catalyst, such as Pd on BaSO4, Lindlar's catalyst, and the like. It is appreciated that either the Z or E double bond geometry of compound I-d may be advantageously obtained by the appropriate choice of reaction conditions. The analogous synthesis of compounds of formula II may be accomplished by this process.
  • Compounds of formula I and II where R3 is phthalimido are conveniently treated with hydrazine or a hydrazine derivative, for example methylhydrazine, to prepare the corresponding 2-(3-amino-4-substituted azetidin-2-on-1-yl)alkanedioic acid derivatives xiii, as illustrated in Synthetic Scheme IX for compounds of formula I, where the integer n, and the groups R2, R4, R12, A, and A′ are as previously defined. This compound may then be treated with an appropriate alkylating or acylating agent to prepare the corresponding amines or amides I-g, or alternatively intermediates xiii may be treated with an appropriate isocyanate to prepare the corresponding ureas I-h.
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00023
  • The ureas I-h are prepared by treating a solution of the appropriate amine xiii in a suitable solvent, such as chloroform or dichloromethane, with an appropriate isocyanate, R12NCO. If necessary, an excess of the isocyanate is employed to ensure complete reaction of the starting amine. The reactions are performed at about ambient temperature to about 45° C., for from about three hours to about three days. Typically, the product may be isolated by washing the reaction with Water and concentrating the remaining organic components under reduced pressure. When an excess of isocyanate has been used, however, a polymer bound primary or secondary amine, such as an aminomethylated polystyrene, may be conveniently added to facilitate removal of the excess reagent. Isolation of products from reactions where a polymer bound reagent has been used is greatly simplified, requiring only filtration of the reaction mixture and then concentration of the filtrate under reduced pressure.
  • The substituted amines and amides I-g are prepared by treating a solution of the appropriate amine xiii in a suitable solvent, such as chloroform or dichloromethane, with an appropriate acylating or alkylating agent, R12—C(O)Z or R12-Z, respectively. If necessary, an excess of the acylating or alkylating agent is employed to ensure complete reaction of the starting amine. The reactions are performed at about ambient temperature to about 45° C., for from about three hours to about three days. Typically, the product may be isolated by washing the reaction with water and concentrating the remaining organic components under reduced pressure. When an excess of the acylating or alkylating agent has been used, however, a polymer bound primary or secondary amine, such as an aminomethylated polystyrene, may be conveniently added to facilitate removal of the excess reagent. Isolation of products from reactions where a polymer bound reagent has been used is greatly simplified, requiring only filtration of the reaction mixture and then concentration of the filtrate under reduced pressure. The analogous synthesis of compounds of formula II may be accomplished by this process.
  • The following preparations and examples further illustrate the synthesis of the compounds of this invention and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention in any way. Unless otherwise indicated, all reactions were performed at ambient temperature, and all evaporations were performed in vacuo. All of the compounds described below were characterized by standard analytical techniques, including nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy (1H NMR) and mass spectral analysis (MS).
    • EXAMPLE 1 (4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)acetyl chloride
  • A solution of 1.0 equivalent of (4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)acetic acid (Evans, U.S. Pat. No. 4,665,171) and 1.3 equivalent of oxalyl chloride in 200 mL dichloromethane was treated with a catalytic amount of anhydrous dimethylformamide (85 μL/milliequivalent of acetic acid derivative) resulting in vigorous gas evolution. After 45 minutes all gas evolution had ceased and the reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to provide the title compound as an off-white solid after drying for 2 h under vacuum.
    • EXAMPLE 2 General Procedure for Amide Formation from an Activated Ester Derivative N-Benzyloxycarbonyl-L-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-(3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide
  • A solution of N-benzyloxycarbonyl-L-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-N-hydroxysuccinimide ester (1.95 g, 4.64 mmol, Advanced ChemTech) in 20 mL of dry tetrahydrofuran was treated with 0.68 mL (4.74 mmol) of 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine. Upon completion (TLC, 60:40 hexanes/ethyl acetate), the mixture was evaporated, and the resulting oil was partitioned between dichloromethane and a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate. The organic layer was evaporated to give 2.23 g (quantitative yield) of the title compound as a white solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.39 (s, 9H), 2.61 (dd, J=6.5 Hz, J=17.2 Hz, 1H), 2.98 (dd, J=3.7 Hz, J=17.0 Hz, 1H), 4.41 (dd, J=5.9 Hz, J=15.3 Hz, 1H), 4.50-4.57 (m, 2H), 5.15 (s, 2H), 5.96-5.99 (m, 1H), 6.95 (s, 1H), 7.29-7.34 (m, 5H), 7.39-7.43 (m, 2H), 7.48-7.52 (m, 2H).
  • Examples 3-5 were prepared according to the procedure of Example 2, except that N-benzyloxycarbonyl-L-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-N-hydroxysuccinimide ester was replaced by the appropriate amino acid derivative, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine.
    • EXAMPLE 3 N-Benzyloxycarbonyl-L-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-[4-(2-phenylethyl)]piperazinamide
  • N-benzyloxycarbonyl-L-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-N-hydroxysuccinimide ester (5.0 g, 12 mmol, Advanced ChemTech) and 4-(phenylethyl)piperazine 2.27 mL (11.9 mmol) gave 5.89 g (quantitative yield) of the title compound as an off-white oil; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.40 (s, 9H), 2.45-2.80 (m, 10H), 3.50-3.80 (m, 4H), 4.87-4.91 (m, 1H), 5.08 (s, 2H), 5.62-5.66 (m, 1H), 7.17-7.33 (m, 10H).
    • EXAMPLE 4 N-Benzyloxycarbonyl-L-glutamic acid γ-t-butyl ester α-(3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide
  • N-benzyloxycarbonyl-L-glutamic acid β-t-butyl ester α-N-hydroxysuccinimide ester (4.83 g, 11.1 mmol, Advanced ChemTech) and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzylamine) 1.63 mL (11.4 mmol) gave 5.41 g (98%) of the title compound as an off-white solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.40 (s, 9H), 1.88-1.99 (m, 1H), 2.03-2.13 (m, 1H), 2.23-2.33 (m, 1H), 2.38-2.47 (m, 1H), 4.19-4.25 (s, 1H), 4.46-4.48 (m, 2H), 5.05-5.08 (m, 2H), 5.67-5.72 (m, 1H), 7.27-7.34 (m, 5H), 7.39-7.43 (m, 2H), 7.48-7.52 (m, 2H).
    • EXAMPLE 5 N-Benzyloxycarbonyl-L-glutamic acid γ-t-butyl ester α-[4-(2-phenylethyl)]piperazinamide
  • N-benzyloxycarbonyl-L-glutamic acid γ-t-butyl ester α-N-hydroxysuccinimide ester (5.0 g, 12 mmol, Advanced ChemTech) and 4 (phenylethyl)piperazine 2.19 mL (11.5 mmol) gave 5.87 g (quantitative yield) of the title compound as an off-white oil; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.43 (s, 9H); 1.64-1.73 (m, 1H); 1.93-2.01 (m, 1H); 2.23-2.40 (m, 2H); 2.42-2.68 (m, 6H); 2.75-2.85 (m, 2H); 3.61-3.74 (m, 4H); 4.66-4.73 (m, 1H); 5.03-5.12 (m, 2H); 5.69-5.72 (m, 1H); 7.16-7.34 (m, 10H).
    • EXAMPLE 5A N-[(9H-Fluoren-9-yl)methoxycarbonyl]-O-(benzyl)-D-serine t-Butyl ester
  • N-[(9H-Fluoren-9-yl)methoxycarbonyl]-O-(benzyl)-D-serine (0.710 g, 1.70 mmole) in dichloromethane (8 mL) was treated with t-butyl acetate (3 mL) and concentrated sulfuric acid (40 μL) in a sealed flask at 0° C. Upon completion (TLC), the reaction was quenched with of dichloromethane (10 mL) and saturated aqueous potassium bicarbonate (15 mL). The organic layer was washed with distilled water, and evaporated. The resulting residue was purified by flash column chromatography (98:2 dichloromethane/methanol) to yield the title compound as a colorless oil (0.292 g, 77%); 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.44 (s, 9H); 3.68 (dd, J=2.9 Hz, J=9.3 Hz, 1H); 3.87 (dd, J=2.9 Hz, J=9.3 Hz, 1H); 4.22 (t, J=7.1 Hz, 1H); 4.30-4.6.0 (m, 5H); 5.64-5.67 (m, 1H); 7.25-7.39 (m, 9H); 7.58-7.61 (m, 2H); 7.73-7.76 (m, 2H).
    • EXAMPLE 5B O-(Benzyl)-D-serine t-Butyl ester
  • Example 5A (0.620 g, 1.31 mmol) in dichloromethane (5 mL) was treated with tris(2-aminoethyl)amine (2.75 mL) for 5 h. The resulting mixture was washed twice with a phosphate buffer (pH=5.5), once with saturated aqueous potassium bicarbonate, and evaporated to give 0.329 g (quantitative yield) of the title compound as an off-white solid; 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 1.44 (s, 9H); 3.48 (dd, J=J′=4.2 Hz, 1H); 3.61 (dd, J=4.0 Hz, J=9.2 Hz, 1H); 3.72 (dd, J=4.6 Hz, J=9.2 Hz, 1H); 4.47 (d, J=12.0 Hz, 1H); 4.55 (d, J=12.0 Hz, 1H); 7.26-7.33 (m, 5H).
    • EXAMPLE 6 General Procedure for Amide Formation from a Carboxylic Acid N-Benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-(3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide
  • A solution of 1 g (2.93 mmol) of N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester monohydrate (Novabiochem) in 3-4 mL of dichloromethane was treated by sequential addition of 0.46 mL (3.21 mmol) of 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzylamine, 0.44 g (3.23 mmol) of 1-hydroxy-7-benzotriazole, and 0.62 g (3.23 mmol) of 1-[3-(dimethylamino)propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride. After at least 12 hours at ambient temperature or until complete as determined by thin layer chromatography (95:5 dichloromethane/methanol eluent), the reaction mixture was washed sequentially with a saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution and with distilled water. The organic layer was evaporated to give 1.41 g (quantitative yield) of the title compound as an off-white solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.39 (s, 9H); 2.61 (dd, J=6.5 Hz, J=17.2 Hz, 1H); 2.98 (dd, J=4.2 Hz, J=17.2 Hz, 1H); 4.41 (dd, J=5.9 Hz, J=15.3 Hz, 1H); 4.50-4.57 (m, 2H); 5.10 (s, 2H); 5.96-6.01 (m, 1H); 6.91-7.00 (m, 1H); 7.30-7.36 (m, 5H); 7.39-7.43 (m, 2H); 7.48-7.52 (m, 2H).
  • Examples 7 and 7A-7E were prepared according to the procedure of Example 6, except that N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced by the appropriate amino acid derivative, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine.
    • EXAMPLE 7 N-Benzyloxycarbonyl-D-glutamic acid γ-t-butyl ester α-(3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide
  • N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-glutamic acid γ-t-butyl ester (1.14 g, 3.37 mmol) and 0.53 mL (3.70 mmol, Novabiochem) of 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzylamine gave 1.67 g (quantitative yield) of Example 7 as an off-white solid.
    • EXAMPLE 7A N-Benzyloxycarbonyl-L-glutamic acid α-t-butyl ester γ-(4-cyclohexyl)piperazinamide
  • N-benzyloxycarbonyl-L-glutamic acid α-t-butyl ester (1.36 g, 4.03 mmol) and 0.746 g (4.43 mmol) of 1-cyclohexylpiperazine gave 1.93 g (98%) of Example 7A as an off-white solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.02-1.12 (m, 5H); 1.43 (s, 9H), 1.60-1.64 (m, 1H); 1.80-1.93 (m, 5H); 2.18-1.52 (m, 8H); 3.38-3.60 (m, 4H); 4.20-4.24 (m, 1H); 5.03-5.13 (m, 2H); 5.53-5.57 (m, 1H); 7.28-7.34 (m, 5H).
    • EXAMPLE 7B N-Benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-(2-fluoro-3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide
  • N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester monohydrate (Novabiochem) (0.25 g, 0.73 mmol) and 0.12 mL of (2-fluoro-3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamine gave 0.365 g (quantitative yield) of Example 7B as an off-white solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.38 (s, 9H); 2.59 (dd, J=6.5 Hz, J=17.0 Hz, 1H); 2.95 (dd, J=4.3 Hz, J=17.0 Hz, 1H); 4.46-4.56 (m, 3H); 5.11 (s, 2H); 5.94-5.96 (m, 1H); 7.15 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H); 7.30-7.36 (m, 5H); 7.47-7.52 (m, 2H).
    • EXAMPLE 7C N-Benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-[(S)-α-methylbenzyl]amide
  • N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester monohydrate (Novabiochem) (0.25 g, 0.73 mmol) and 0.094 mL of (S)-α-methylbenzylamine gave 0.281 g (90%) of Example 7C as an off-white solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.41 (s, 9H); 1.44 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 3H); 2.61 (dd, J=7.0 Hz, J=17.0 Hz, 1H); 2.93 (dd, J=4.0 Hz, J=17.5 Hz, 1H); 4.50-4.54 (m, 1H); 5.04-5.14 (m, 3H); 5.94-5.96 (m, 1H); 6.76-6.80 (m, 1H); 7.21-7.37 (m, 10H).
    • EXAMPLE 7D N-Benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-[(R)-α-methylbenzyl]amide
  • N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester monohydrate (Novabiochem) (0.25 g, 0.73 mmol) and 0.094 mL of (R)-α-methylbenzylamine gave 0.281 g (90%) of Example 7D as an off-white solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.38 (s, 9H); 1.43 (d, J=6.9 Hz, 3H); 2.54 (dd, J=7.3 Hz, J=17.2 Hz, 1H); 2.87 (dd, J=4.1 Hz, J=17.3 Hz, 1H); 4.46-4.50 (m, 1H); 4.99-5.15 (m, 3H); 5.92-5.96 (m, 1H); 6.78-6.82 (m, 1H); 7.21-7.33 (m, 10H).
    • EXAMPLE 7E N-Benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid γ-t-butyl ester α-[N-methyl-N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)]amide
  • N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid γ-t-butyl ester (0.303 g, 0.89 mmol, Novabiochem) and 0.168 g (0.89 mmol) of N-methyl-N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amine gave 0.287 g (65%) of Example 7E as an off-white solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.40 (s, 9H); 2.55 (dd, J=5.8 Hz, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 2.81 (dd, J=7.8 Hz, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 3.10 (s, 3H); 4.25 (d, J=15.0 Hz, 1H); 4.80 (d, J=15.5 Hz, 1H); 5.01-5.13 (m, 3H); 5.52-5.55 (m, 1H); 7.25-7.52 (m, 10H).
    • EXAMPLE 8 General Procedure for Hydrogenation of a Benzyloxycarbonyl Amine L-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-(3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide
  • A suspension of 2.23 g (4.64 mmol) of N-benzyloxycarbonyl-L-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-(3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide and palladium (5% wt. on activated carbon, 0.642 g) in 30 mL of methanol was held under an atmosphere of hydrogen until complete conversion as determined by thin layer chromatography (95:5 dichloromethane/methanol eluent). The reaction was filtered to remove the palladium over carbon and the filtrate was evaporated to give 1.52 g (96%) of the title compound as an oil; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.42 (s, 9H); 2.26 (brs, 2H); 2.63-2.71 (m, 1H); 2.82-2.87 (m, 1H); 3.75-3.77 (m, 1H); 4.47-4.50 (m, 2H); 7.41-7.52 (m, 4H); 7.90 (brs, 1H).
  • Examples 9-13 and 13A-13E were prepared according to the procedure of Example 8, except that N-benzyloxycarbonyl-L-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-(3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide was replaced by the appropriate amino acid derivative.
    • EXAMPLE 9 L-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-[4-(2-phenylethyl)]piperazinamide
  • N-benzyloxycarbonyl-L-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-[4-(2-phenylethyl)]piperazinamide (5.89 g, 11.9 mmol) gave 4.24 g (98%) of Example 9 as an off-white oil; 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 1.42 (s, 9H); 2.61-2.95 (m, 10H); 3.60-3.90 (m, 4H); 4.35-4.45 (m, 1H); 7.17-7.29 (m, 5H).
    • EXAMPLE 10 D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-(3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide
  • N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-(3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide (1.41 g, 2.93 mmol) gave 0.973 g (96%) of Example 10 as an off-white oil; 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 1.42 (s, 9H); 2.21 (brs, 2H); 2.67 (dd, J=7.1 Hz, J=16.8 Hz, 1H); 2.84 (dd, J=3.6 Hz, J=16.7 Hz, 1H); 3.73-3.77 (m, 1H); 4.47-4.50 (m, 2H); 7.41-7.52 (m, 4H); 7.83-7.87 (m, 1H).
    • EXAMPLE 11 L-glutamic acid γ-t-butyl ester α-(3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide
  • N-benzyloxycarbonyl-L-glutamic acid γ-t-butyl ester α-(3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide (5.41 g, 10.9 mmol) gave 3.94 g (quantitative yield) of Example 11 as an off-white oil; 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 1.41 (s, 9H); 1.73-1.89 (m, 3H); 2.05-2.16 (m, 1H); 2.32-2.38 (m, 2H); 3.47 (dd, J=5.0 Hz, J=7.5 Hz, 1H); 4.47-4.49 (m, 2H); 7.36-7.54 (m, 4H); 7.69-7.77 (m, 1H).
    • EXAMPLE 12 L-glutamic acid γ-t-butyl ester α-[4-(2-phenylethyl)]piperazinamide
  • N-benzyloxycarbonyl-L-glutamic acid γ-t-butyl ester α-[4-(2-phenylethyl)]piperazinamide (5.86 g, 11.50 mmol) gave 4.28 g (99%) of Example 12 as an off-white oil; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.39 (s, 9H); 2.00-2.08 (m, 1H); 2.38-2.46 (m, 1H); 2.55-2.90 (m, 9H); 3.61-3.82 (m, 4H); 4.48-4.56 (m, 1H); 7.17-7.26 (m, 5H).
    • EXAMPLE 13 D-glutamic acid γ-t-butyl ester α-(3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide
  • N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-glutamic acid γ-t-butyl ester α-(3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide (1.667 g, 3.37 mmol) gave 1.15 g (94%) of Example 13 as an off-white oil; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.41 (s, 9H); 1.80-2.20 (m, 4H); 2.31-2.40 (m, 2H); 3.51-3.59 (m, 1H); 4.47-4.49 (m, 2H); 7.39-7.52 (m, 4H); 7.71-7.79 (m, 1H).
    • EXAMPLE 13A L-glutamic acid α-t-butyl ester γ-(4-cyclohexyl)piperazinamide
  • N-Benzyloxycarbonyl-L-glutamic acid α-t-butyl ester γ-(4-cyclohexyl)piperazinamide (1.93 g, 3.96 mmol) gave 1.30 g (93%) of Example 13A as an off-white oil; 1H NMR (CDCl3) 8.1.02-1.25 (m, 5H); 1.41 (s, 9H); 1.45-1.50 (m, 1H); 1.56-1.60 (m, 1H); 1.69-1.80 (m, 6H); 3.30 (dd, J=4.8 Hz, J=8.5 Hz, 1H); 3.44 (t, J=9.9 Hz, 2H); 3.56 (t, J=9.9 Hz, 2H).
    • EXAMPLE 13B D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-(2-fluoro-3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide
  • N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-(2-fluoro-3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide (0.36 g, 0.72 mmol) gave 0.256 g (92%) of Example 13B as an off-white oil; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.39 (s, 9H); 2.50 (brs, 2H); 2.74 (dd, J=7.0 Hz, J=16.5 Hz, 1H); 2.86 (dd, J=4.8 Hz, J=16.8 Hz, 1H); 3.89 (brs, 2H); 4.47-4.57 (m, 2H); 7.16 (t, J=7.8 Hz, 1H); 7.48 (t, J=7.3 Hz, 1H); 7.56 (t, J=7.3 Hz, 1H); 7.97-8.02 (m, 1H).
    • EXAMPLE 13C D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-[(S)-α-methyl]benzylamide
  • N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-[(S)-α-methylbenzyl]amide (0.275 g, 0.65 mmol) gave 0.17 g (90%) of Example 13C as an off-white oil; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.40 (s, 9H); 1.47 (d, J=6.9 Hz, 3H); 1.98 (brs, 2H); 2.49 (dd, J=7.9 Hz, J=17.7 Hz, 1H); 2.83 (dd, J=3.6 Hz, J=16.7 Hz, 1H); 3.69 (brs, 1H); 4.99-5.10 (m, 1H); 7.19-7.33 (m, 5H); 7.65-7.68 (m, 1H).
    • EXAMPLE 13D D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-[(R)-α-methylbenzyl]amide
  • N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl, ester α-[(R)-α-methylbenzyl]amide (0.273 g, 0.64 mmol) gave 0.187 g (quantitative yield) of Example 13D as an off-white oil; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.38 (s, 9H); 1.46 (d, J=6.9 Hz, 3H); 1.79 (brs, 2H); 2.51 (dd, J=7.8 Hz, J=17.5 Hz, 1H); 2.87 (dd, J=3.6 Hz, J=16.9 Hz, 1H); 4.19 (brs, 1H); 4.99-5.11 (m, 1H); 7.18-7.34 (m, 5H); 7.86-7.90 (m, 1H).
    • EXAMPLE 13E D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-[N-methyl-N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)]amide
  • N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-[N-methyl-N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)]amide (0.282 g, 0.57 mmol) gave 0.195 g (95%) of Example 13E as an off-white oil.
    • EXAMPLE 14 General Procedure for Formation of a 2-Azetidinone from an Imine and an Acetyl Chloride
  • Step 1: General Procedure for Formation of an Imine from an Amino Acid Derivative.
  • A solution of 1 equivalent of an α-amino acid ester or amide in dichloromethane is treated sequentially with 1 equivalent of an appropriate aldehyde, and a dessicating agent, such as magnesium sulfate or silica gel, in the amount of about 2 grams of dessicating agent per gram of starting α-amino acid ester or amide. The reaction is stirred at ambient temperature until all of the reactants are consumed as measured by thin layer chromatography. The reactions are typically complete within an hour. The reaction mixture is then filtered, the filter cake is washed with dichloromethane, and the filtrate concentrated under reduced pressure to provide the desired imine that is used as is in the subsequent step.
  • Step 2: General Procedure for the 2+2 Cycloaddition of an Imine and an Acetyl Chloride.
  • A dichloromethane solution of the imine (10 mL dichloromethane/1 gram imine) is cooled to 0° C. To this cooled solution is added 1.5 equivalents of an appropriate amine, typically triethylamine, followed by the dropwise addition of a dichloromethane solution of 1.1 equivalents of an appropriate acetyl chloride, such as that described in Example 1 (10 mL dichloromethane/1 gm appropriate acetyl chloride). The reaction mixture is allowed to warm to ambient temperature over 1 h and is then quenched by the addition of a saturated aqueous solution of ammonium chloride. The resulting mixture is partitioned between water and dichloromethane. The layers are separated and the organic layer is washed successively with 1N hydrochloric acid, saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate, and saturated aqueous sodium chloride. The organic layer is dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue may be used directly for further reactions, or purified by chromatography or by crystallization from an appropriate solvent system if desired.
    • EXAMPLE 15 tert-Butyl[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetate
  • Using the procedure of Example 14, the imine prepared from 4.53 g (34.5 mmol) glycine tert-butyl ester and cinnamaldehyde was combined with 2-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl) acetyl chloride (Example 1) to give 5.5 g (30%) of Example 15 as colorless crystals (recrystallized, n-chlorobutane); mp 194-195° C.
    • EXAMPLE 16 General procedure for acylation of an (azetidin-2-on-1-yl)acetate
  • A solution of (azetidin-2-on-1-yl)acetate in tetrahydrofuran (0.22 M in azetidinone) is cooled to −78° C. and is with lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (2.2 equivalents). The resulting anion is treated with an appropriate acyl halide (1.1 equivalents). Upon complete conversion of the azetidinone, the reaction is quenched with saturated aqueous ammonium chloride and partitioned between ethyl acetate and water. The organic phase is washed sequentially with 1N hydrochloric acid, saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate, and saturated aqueous sodium chloride. The resulting organic layer is dried (magnesium sulfate) and evaporated. The residue is purified by silica gel chromatography with an appropriate eluent, such as 3:2 hexane/ethyl acetate.
    • EXAMPLE 17 2,2,2-Trichloroethyl 2(RS)-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetate
  • Using the procedure of Example 16, 9.0 g (20 mmol) of Example 15 was acylated with 4.2 g (20 mmol) of trichloroethylchloroformate to give 7.0 g (56%) of Example 17; mp 176-178° C.
    • EXAMPLE 18 2(RS)-(tert-Butoxycarbonyl)-2-[3 (S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide
  • A solution of 0.20 g (0.32 mmol) of Example 17 and 52 μL (0.36 mmol) of (3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amine in THF was heated at reflux. Upon complete conversion (TLC), the solvent was evaporated and the residue was recrystallized (chloroform/hexane) to give 0.17 g (82%) of Example 18 as a white solid; mp 182-184° C.
  • Examples 19-25 and 25A-25H were prepared according to the procedure of Example 14, where the appropriate amino acid derivative and aldehyde were used in Step 1, and the appropriate acetyl chloride was used in Step 2.
    • EXAMPLE 19 2(S)-(tert-Butoxycarbonylmethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide
  • The imine prepared from 1.52 g (4.39 mmol) of L-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-(3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide and cinnamaldehyde was combined with 2-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)acetyl chloride (Example 1) to give 2.94 g of an orange-brown oil that gave, after flash column chromatography purification (70:30 hexanes/ethyl acetate), 2.06 g (70%) of Example 19 as a white solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.39 (s, 9H); 2.46 (dd, J=11.1 Hz, J=16.3 Hz, 1H); 3.18 (dd, J=3.8 Hz, J=16.4 Hz, 1H); 4.12-4.17 (m, 1H); 4.26 (d, J=5.0 Hz, 1H); 4.45 (dd, J=6.0 Hz, J=14.9 Hz, 1H); 4.54 (dd, J=5.3 Hz, J=9.8 Hz, 1H); 4.58-4.66 (m, 3H); 4.69-4.75 (m, 1H); 4.81 (dd, J=3.8 Hz, J=11.1 Hz, 1H); 6.25 (dd, J=9.6 Hz, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 6.70 (d, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 7.14-7.17 (m, 2H); 7.28-7.46 (m, 11H); 7.62 (s, 1H); 8.27-8.32 (m, 1H).
    • EXAMPLE 20 2(S)-(tert-Butoxycarbonylethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide
  • The imine prepared from 3.94 g (10.93 mmol) of L-glutamic acid γ-t-butyl ester α-(3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide and cinnamaldehyde was combined with 2-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)acetyl chloride (Example 1) to give 5.53 g (75%) of Example 20 after flash column chromatography purification (70:30 hexanes/ethyl acetate); 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.36 (s, 9H); 1.85-1.96 (m, 1H); 2.18-2.49 (m, 3H); 4.14-4.19 (m, 1H); 4.30 (d, J=4.9 Hz, 2H); 4.44 (dd, J=6.1 Hz, J=14.9 Hz, 1H); 4.56-4.67 (m, 4H); 4.71-4.75 (m, 1H); 6.26 (dd, J=9.6 Hz, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 6.71 (d, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 7.16-7.18 (m, 2H); 7.27-7.49 (m, 11H); 7.60 (s, 1H); 8.08-8.12 (m, 1H).
    • EXAMPLE 21 2(S)-(tert-Butoxycarbonylmethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-[4-(2-phenylethyl)]piperazinamide
  • The imine prepared from 4.20 g (11.6 mmol) of L-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-[4-(2-phenylethyl)]piperazinamide and cinnamaldehyde was combined with 2-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)acetyl chloride (Example 1) to give 4.37 g (55%) of Example 21 after flash column chromatography purification (50:50 hexanes/ethyl acetate); 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.34 (s, 9H); 2.26-2.32 (m, 1H); 2.46-2.63 (m, 4H); 2.75-2.89 (m, 4H); 3.24-3.32 (m, 1H); 3.49-3.76 (m, 3H); 4.07-4.13 (m, 1H); 4.30 (d, J=4.6 Hz, 1H); 4.22-4.48 (m, 1H); 4.55-4.61 (m, 1H); 4.69-4.75 (m, 1H); 5.04-5.09 (m, 1H); 6.15 (dd, J=9.3 Hz, J=15.9 Hz, 1H); 6.63 (d, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 7.18-7.42 (m, 15H).
    • EXAMPLE 22 2(S)-(tert-Butoxycarbonylethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-[4-(2-phenylethyl)]piperazinamide
  • The imine prepared from 2.54 g (6.75 mmol) of L-glutamic acid γ-t-butyl ester α-[4-(2-phenylethyl)]piperazinamide and cinnamaldehyde was combined with 2-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)acetyl chloride (Example 1) to give 3.55 g (76%) of Example 22 after flash column chromatography purification (50:50 hexanes/ethyl acetate); 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.32 (s, 9H); 1.96-2.07 (m, 1H); 2.15-2.44 (m, 6H); 2.54-2.62 (m, 2H); 2.69-2.81 (m, 3H); 3.28-3.34 (m, 1H); 3.59-3.68 (m, 1H); 4.08-4.13 (m, 1H); 4.33-4.44 (m, 2H); 4.48-4.60 (m, 2H); 4.67-4.77 (m, 1H); 6.14 (dd, J=8.9 Hz, J=16.0 Hz, 1H); 6.62 (d, J=16.0 Hz, 1H); 7.16-7.42 (m, 15H).
    • EXAMPLE 23 2(R)-(tert-Butoxycarbonylmethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide
  • The imine prepared from 0.973 g (2.81 mmol) of D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-(3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide and cinnamaldehyde was combined with 2-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)acetyl chloride (Example 1) to give 1.53 g (82%) of Example 23 after flash column chromatography purification (70:30 hexanes/ethyl acetate); 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.37 (s, 9H); 3.10 (dd, J=3.7 Hz, J=17.8 Hz, 1H); 3.20 (dd, J=10.7 Hz, J=17.8 Hz, 1H); 4.02 (dd, J=3.6 Hz, J=10.6 Hz, 1H); 4.11-4.17 (m, 1H); 4.24 (d, J=4.9 Hz, 1H); 4.46 (dd, J=5.8 Hz, J=15.1 Hz, 1H); 4.58-4.67 (m, 3H); 4.70-4.76 (m, 1H); 6.27 (dd, J=9.5 Hz, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 6.79 (d, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 7.25-7.50 (m, 13H); 7.63 (s, 1H); 8.50-8.54 (m, 1H).
    • EXAMPLE 24 2(R)-(tert-Butoxycarbonylethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide
  • The imine prepared from 1.15 g (3.20 mmol) of D-glutamic acid γ-t-butyl ester α-(3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide and cinnamaldehyde was combined with 2-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)acetyl chloride (Example 1) to give 1.84 g (85%) of Example 24 after flash column chromatography purification (70:30 hexanes/ethyl acetate); 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.37 (s, 9H); 2.23-2.39 (m, 4H); 3.71-3.75 (m, 1H); 4.13-4.18 (m, 1H); 4.31 (d, J=4.9 Hz, 1H); 4.44-4.51 (m, 2H); 4.56-4.68 (m, 2H); 4.71-4.76 (m, 1H); 6.26 (dd, J=9.5 Hz, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 6.71 (d, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 7.25-7.52 (m, 13H); 7.63 (s, 1H); 8.25-8.30 (m, 1H).
    • EXAMPLE 25 2(S)-(tert-Butoxycarbonylethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(4-cyclohexyl)piperazinamide
  • The imine prepared from 2.58 g (5.94 mmol) of L-glutamic acid γ-t-butyl ester α-(4-cyclohexyl)piperazinamide and cinnamaldehyde was combined with 2-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)acetyl chloride (Example 1) to give 3.27 g (94%) of Example 25 after flash column chromatography purification (95:5 dichloromethane/methanol); 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.32 (s, 9H); 1.10-1.18 (m, 1H); 1.20-1.31 (m, 2H); 1.38-1.45 (m, 2H); 1.61-1.66 (m, 1H); 1.84-1.89 (m, 2H); 1.95-2.01 (m, 1H); 2.04-2.14 (m, 3H); 2.20-2.24 (m, 1H); 2.29-2.35 (m, 1H); 2.85-2.92 (m, 1H); 3.24-3.32 (m, 1H); 3.36-3.45 (m, 2H); 3.80-3.86 (m, 1H); 4.08 (t, J=8.3 Hz, 1H); 4.27 (d, J=5.0 Hz, 1H); 4.31-4.55 (m, 4H); 4.71 (t, J=8.3 Hz, 1H); 4.83-4.90 (m, 1H); 6.18 (dd, J=9.1 Hz, J=15.9 Hz, 1H); 6.67 (d, J=15.9 Hz, 1H); 7.25-7.44 (m, 10H); 8.22 (brs, 1H).
    • EXAMPLE 25A tert-Butyl 2(S)-(2-(4-cyclohexylpiperazin-1-ylcarbonyl)ethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetate
  • The imine prepared from 1.282 g (3.63 mmol) of L-glutamic acid α-t-butyl ester γ-(4-cyclohexyl)piperazinamide and cinnamaldehyde was combined with 2-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)acetyl chloride (Example 1) to give 1.946 g (80%) of Example 25A after flash column chromatography purification (50:50 hexanes/ethyl acetate); 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.15-1.26 (m, 6H); 1.39 (s, 9H); 1.55-1.64 (m, 2H); 1.77-1.83 (m, 3H); 2.22-2.35 (m, 2H); 2.40-2.50 (m, 6H); 2.75-2.79 (m, 1H); 3.43-3.48 (m, 1H); 3.56-3.60 (m, 2H); 3.75-3.79 (m, 1H); 4.10 (t, J=8.3 Hz, 1H); 4.31-4.35 (m, 2H); 4.58 (t, J=8.8 Hz, 1H); 4.73 (t, J=8.4 Hz, 1H); 6.17 (dd, J=8.6 Hz, J=16.0 Hz, 1H); 6.65 (d, J=16.0 Hz, 1H); 7.27-7.42 (m, 10H).
    • EXAMPLE 25B 2(R)-(tert-Butoxycarbonylmethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(2-fluoro-3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide
  • The imine prepared from 0.256 g (0.70 mmol) of D-aspartic acid γ-t-butyl ester α-(2-fluoro-3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide and cinnamaldehyde was combined with 2-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)acetyl chloride (Example 1) to give 0.287 g (60%) of Example 25B after flash column chromatography purification (70:30 hexanes/ethyl acetate); 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.38 (s, 9H); 3.12 (dd, J=4.0 Hz, J=17.8 Hz, 1H); 3.20 (dd, J=10.4 Hz, J=17.8 Hz, 1H); 4.05 (dd, J=3.9 Hz, J=10.4 Hz, 1H); 4.14 (dd, J=J′=8.2 Hz, 1H); 4.25 (d, J=4.9 Hz, 1H); 0.459-4.67 (m, 4H); 4.74 (t, J=8.3 Hz, 1H); 6.36 (dd, J=9.6 Hz, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 6.83 (d, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 7.02-7.07 (m, 1H); 7.28-7.55 (m, 12H); 8.44-8.48 (m, 1H).
    • EXAMPLE 25C 2(R)-(tert-Butoxycarbonylmethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N—[(S)-α-methylbenzyl]amide
  • The imine prepared from 0.167 g (0.57 mmol) of D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester[(S)-α-methylbenzyl]amide and cinnamaldehyde was combined with 2-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl) acetyl chloride (Example 1) to give 0.219 g (63%) of Example 25C after flash column chromatography purification (70:30 hexanes/ethyl acetate); 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.35 (s, 9H); 1.56 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 3H); 2.97 (dd, J=3.5 Hz, J=18.0 Hz, 1H); 3.15 (dd, J=11.0 Hz, J=17.5 Hz, 1H); 4.01 (dd, J=3.0 Hz, J=11.0 Hz, 1H); 4.14 (t, J=8.5 Hz, 1H); 4.24 (d, J=5.0 Hz, 1H); 4.57 (dd, J=5.0 Hz, J=9.5 Hz, 1H); 4.64 (t, J=8.8 Hz, 1H); 5.07 (t, J=8.5 Hz, 1H); 5.03-5.09 (m, 1H); 6.43 (dd, J=9.5 Hz, J=16.0 Hz, 1H); 6.83 (d, J=16.0 Hz, 1H); 7.16-7.20 (m, 1H); 7.27-7.49 (m, 14H); 8.07-8.10 (m, 1H).
    • EXAMPLE 25D 2(R)-(tert-Butoxycarbonylmethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N—[(R)-α-methylbenzyl]amide
  • The imine prepared from 0.187 g (0.46 mmol) of D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester[(R)-α-methylbenzyl]amide and cinnamaldehyde was combined with 2-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)acetyl chloride (Example 1) to give 0.25 g (64%) of Example 25D after flash column chromatography purification (70:30 hexanes/ethyl acetate); 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.36 (s, 9H); 1.59 (d, J=7.1 Hz, 3H); 3.10 (dd, J=3.5 Hz, J=17.8 Hz, 1H); 3.22 (dd, J=10.9 Hz, J=17.8 Hz, 1H); 3.93 (dd, J=3.5 Hz, J=10.8 Hz, 1H); 4.14 (t, J=8.1 Hz, 1H); 4.24 (d, J=5.0 Hz, 1H); 4.58 (dd, J=5.0 Hz, J=9.5 Hz, 1H); 4.65 (t, J=8.7 Hz, 1H); 4.74 (t, J=8.2 Hz, 1H); 5.06-5.14 (m, 1H); 6.32 (dd, J=9.5 Hz, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 6.74 (d, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 7.19-7.43 (m, 15H); 8.15-8.18 (m, 1H).
    • EXAMPLE 25E 2(R)-(tert-Butoxycarbonylmethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-methyl-N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide
  • The imine prepared from 0.195 g (0.41 mmol) of D-aspartic acid γ-t-butyl ester α-[N-methyl-N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)]amide and cinnamaldehyde was combined with 2-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)acetyl chloride (Example 1) to give 0.253 g (69%) of Example 25E after flash column chromatography purification (70:30 hexanes/ethyl acetate); 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.36 (s, 9H); 2.53 (dd, J=4.0 Hz, J=17.0 Hz, 1H); 3.06 (dd, J=10.8 Hz, J=16.8 Hz, 1); 3.13 (s, 3H); 4.12 (dd, J=8.0 Hz, J=9.0 Hz, 1H); 4.26 (d, J=5.0 Hz, 1H); 4.38 (d, J=15.0 Hz, 1H); 4.46 (dd, J=5.0 Hz, J=9.5 Hz, 1H); 4.56 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 1H); 4.70-4.79 (m, 2H); 5.27 (dd, J=4.0 Hz, J=11.0 Hz, 1H); 6.22 (dd, J=9.3 Hz, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 6.73 (d, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 7.33-7.45 (m, 14H).
    • EXAMPLE 25F 2(S)-(tert-Butoxycarbonylethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-chlorostyr-2-yl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide
  • The imine prepared from 1.62 g (4.44 mmol) of L-glutamic acid γ-t-butyl ester α-(3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide and α-chlorocinnamaldehyde was combined with 2-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)acetyl chloride (Example 1) to give 0.708 g (22%) of Example 25F after flash column chromatography purification (70:30 hexanes/ethyl acetate); 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.35 (s, 9H); 1.68 (brs, 1H); 2.19-2.35 (m, 2H); 2.40-2.61 (m, 2H); 4.13 (dd, J=7.5 Hz, J=9.0 Hz, 1H); 4.22 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 1H); 4.34 (d, J=4.5 Hz, 1H); 4.45 (dd, J=5.5 Hz, J=15.0 Hz, 1H); 4.51-4.60 (m, 3H); 4.89 (dd, J=7.5 Hz, J=8.5 Hz, 1H); 6.89 (s, 1H); 7.28-7.54 (m, 14H).
    • EXAMPLE 25G 2(R)-(tert-Butoxycarbonylmethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2′-methoxystyr-2-yl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide
  • The imine prepared from 0.34 g (0.98 mmol) of D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide and 2-methoxycinnamaldehyde was combined with 2-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)acetyl chloride (Example 1) to give 0.402 g (59%) of Example 25G after flash column chromatography purification (70:30 hexanes/ethyl acetate); 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.35 (s, 9H); 1.68 (brs, 1H); 2.19-2.35 (m, 2H); 2.40-2.61 (m, 2H); 4.13 (dd, J=7.5 Hz, J=9.0 Hz, 1H); 4.22 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 1H); 4.34 (d, J=4.5 Hz, 1H); 4.45 (dd, J=5.5 Hz, J=15.0 Hz, 1H); 4.51-4.60 (m, 3H); 4.89 (dd, J=7.5 Hz, J=8.5 Hz, 1H); 6.89 (s, 1H); 7.28-7.54 (m, 14H).
    • EXAMPLE 25H tert-Butyl (2R)-(Benzyloxymethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetate
  • The imine prepared from 0.329 g (1.31 mmol) of O-(benzyl)-D-serine t-butyl ester and cinnamaldehyde was combined with 2-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)acetyl chloride (Example 1) to give 0.543 g (73%) of Example 25H after flash column chromatography purification (90:10 hexanes/ethyl acetate); 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.39 (s, 9H); 3.56 (dd, J=2.7 Hz, J=9.5 Hz, 1H); 3.82 (dd, J=4.8 Hz, J=9.5 Hz, 1H); 4.11 (t, J=8.3 Hz, 1H); 4.21-4.29 (m, 2H); 4.50-4.58 (m, 3H); 4.71-4.78 (m, 2H); 6.19 (dd, J=9.1 Hz, J=16.0 Hz, 1H); 6.49 (d, J=16.0 Hz, 1H); 7.07-7.11 (m, 1H); 7.19-7.40 (m, 14H).
    • EXAMPLE 26 General Procedure for Hydrolysis of a Tert-Butyl Ester
  • A solution of tert-butyl ester derivative in formic acid, typically 1 g in 10 mL, is stirred at ambient temperature until no more ester is detected by thin layer chromatography (dichloromethane 95%/methanol 5%), a typical reaction time being around 3 hours. The formic acid is evaporated under reduced pressure; the resulting solid residue is partitioned between dichloromethane and saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate. The organic layer is evaporated to give an off-white solid that may be used directly for further reactions, or recrystallized from an appropriate solvent system if desired.
  • Examples 27-34 and 34A-34H were prepared from the appropriate tert-butyl ester according to the procedure used in Example 26.
    • EXAMPLE 27 2(R,S)-(Carboxy)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide
  • Example 18 (0.30 g, 0.46 mmol) was hydrolyzed to give 0.27 g (quantitative yield) of Example 27 as an off-white solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 4.17-5.28 (m, 9H); 6.21-6.29 (m, 1H), 6.68-6.82 (m, 1H); 7.05-7.75 (m, 13H); 9.12-9.18 (m, 1H).
    • EXAMPLE 28 2(S)-(Carboxylmethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide
  • Example 19 (1.72 g, 2.59 mmol) was hydrolyzed to give 1.57 g (quantitative yield) of Example 28 as an off-white solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 2.61 (dd, J=9.3 Hz, f=16.6 Hz, 1H); 3.09-3.14 (m, 1H); 4.10-4.13 (m, 1H); 4.30 (d, J=4.5 Hz, 1H); 4.39-4.85 (m, 6H); 6.20 (dd, J=9.6 Hz, J=15.7 Hz, 1H); 6.69 (d, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 7.12-7.15 (m, 2H); 7.26-7.50 (m, 1H); 7.61 (s, 1H); 8.41-8.45 (m, 1H).
    • EXAMPLE 29 2(S)-(Carboxyethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide
  • Example 20 (4.97 g, 7.34 mmol) was hydrolyzed to give 4.43 g (97%) of Example 29 as an off-white solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.92-2.03 (m, 1H); 2.37-2.51 (m, 3H); 4.13-4.19 (m, 1H); 3.32 (d, J=4.9 Hz, 1H); 4.35-4.39 (m, 1H); 4.44 (dd, J=5.9 Hz, J=14.9 Hz, 1H); 4.50-4.57 (m, 2H); 4.61-4.67 (m, 1H); 4.70-4.76 (m, 1H); 6.24 (dd, J=9.6 Hz, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 6.70 (d, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 7.18-7.47 (m, 14H).
    • EXAMPLE 30 2(S)-(Carboxymethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-[4-(2-phenylethyl)]piperazinamide
  • Example 21 (1.88 g, 2.78 mmol) was hydrolyzed to give 1.02 g (60%) of Example 30 as an off-white solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 2.63 (dd, J=6.0 Hz, J=16.5 Hz, 1H); 2.75-2.85 (m, 1H); 3.00 (dd, J=8.2 Hz, J=16.6 Hz, 1H); 3.13-3.26 (m, 4H); 3.37-3.56 (m, 4H); 3.86-4.00 (m, 1H); 4.05-4.11 (m, 1H); 4.24 (d, J=5.0 Hz, 1H); 4.46-4.66 (m, 1H); 4.65-4.70 (m, 1H); 5.10-5.15 (m, 1H); 6.14 (dd, J=9.3 Hz, J=15.9 Hz, 1H); 6.71 (d, J=15.9 Hz, 1H); 7.22-7.41 (m, 15H); 12.02 (s, 1H).
    • EXAMPLE 31 2(S)-(Carboxyethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-[4-(2-phenylethyl)]piperazinamide
  • Example 22 (0.383 g, 0.55 mmol) was hydrolyzed to give 0.352 g (quantitative yield) of Example 31 as an off-white solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.93-2.01 (m, 1H); 2.07-2.36 (m, 6H); 2.82-2.90 (m, 1H); 3.00-3.20 (m, 4H); 3.36-3.54 (m, 4H); 3.74-3.82 (m, 1H); 4.06-4.11 (m, 1H); 4.29 (d, J=4.9 Hz, 1H); 4.33-4.46 (m, 2H); 4.50-4.58 (m, 2H); 4.67-4.72 (m, 1H); 4.95-5.00 (m, 1H); 6.18 (dd, J=9.2 Hz, J=16.0 Hz, 1H); 6.67 (d, J=15.9 Hz, 1H); 7.19-7.42 (m, 15H); 8.80 (brs, 1H).
    • EXAMPLE 32 2(R)-(Carboxymethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide
  • Example 23 (1.51 g, 2.27 mmol) was hydrolyzed to give 1.38 g (quantitative yield) of Example 32 as an off-white solid.
    • EXAMPLE 33 2(R)-(Carboxyethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide
  • Example 24 (0.604 g, 0.89 mmol) was hydrolyzed to give 0.554 g (quantitative yield) of Example 33 as an off-white solid.
    • EXAMPLE 34 2(S)-(Carboxyethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(4-cyclohexyl)piperazinamide
  • Example 25 (0.537 g, 0.80 mmol) was hydrolyzed to give 0.492 g (quantitative yield) of Example 34 as an off-white solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.09-1.17 (m, 1H); 1.22-1.33 (m, 2H); 1.40-1.47 (m, 2H); 1.63-1.67 (m, 1H); 1.85-1.90 (m, 2H); 1.95-2.00 (m, 1H); 2.05-2.15 (m, 3H), 2.20-2.24 (m, 1H); 2.30-2.36 (m, 1H); 2.85-2.93 (m, 1H); 3.25-3.33 (m, 1H); 3.36-3.46 (m, 2H); 3.81-3.87 (m, 1H); 4.08 (t, J=8.3 Hz, 1H); 4.28 (d, J=5.0 Hz, 1H); 4.33-4.56 (m, 4H); 4.70 (t, J=8.3 Hz, 1H); 4.83-4.91 (m, 1H); 6.17 (dd, J=9.1 Hz, J=15.9 Hz, 1H); 6.67 (d, J=15.9 Hz, 1H); 7.25-7.44 (m, 10H); 8.22 (brs, 1H).
    • EXAMPLE 34A 2(S)-(2-(4-Cyclohexylpiperazin-1-ylcarbonyl)ethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid
  • Example 25A (0.787 g, 1.28 mmol) was hydrolyzed to give 0.665 g (92%) of Example 34A as an off-white solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.05-1.13 (m, 1H); 1.20-1.40 (m, 5H); 1.60-1.64 (m, 1H); 1.79-1.83 (m, 2H); 2.00-2.05 (m, 2H); 2.22-2.44 (m, 3H); 2.67-2.71 (m, 1H); 2.93-3.01 (m, 4H); 3.14-3.18 (m, 1H); 3.38-3.42 (m, 1H); 3.48-3.52 (m, 1H); 3.64-3.69 (m, 1H); 4.06-4.14 (m, 2H); 4.34-4.43 (m, 2H); 4.56 (t, J=8.8 Hz, 1H); 4.73 (t, J=8.4 Hz, 1H); 6.15 (dd, J=9.1 Hz, J=16.0 Hz, 1H); 6.65 (d, J=16.0 Hz, 1H); 7.25-7.42 (m, 10H).
    • EXAMPLE 34B 2(R)-(Carboxymethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(2-fluoro-3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)carboxamide
  • Example 25B (0.26 g, 0.38 mmol) was hydrolyzed to give 0.238 g (quantitative yield) of Example 34B as an off-white solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 3.27 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 1H); 4.06 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 1H); 4.15 (t, J=8.1 Hz, 1H); 4.27 (d, J=4.8 Hz, 1H); 4.56-4.76 (m, 5H); 6.34 (dd, J=9.5 Hz, J=15.7 Hz, 1H); 6.80 (d, J=15.7 Hz, 1H); 7.06 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 1H); 7.31-7.54 (m, 12H); 8.58 (t, J=5.9 Hz, 1H).
    • EXAMPLE 34C 2(R)-(Carboxymethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-6 on 1-yl]acetic acid N—[(S)-α-methylbenzyl]amide
  • Example 25C (0.215 g, 0.35 mmol) was hydrolyzed to give 0.195 g (quantitative yield) of Example 34C as an off-white solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.56 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H); 3.10 (dd, J=4.5 Hz, J=17.9 Hz, 1H); 3.18 (dd, J=9.8 Hz, J=17.9 Hz, 1H); 4.00 (dd, J=4.5 Hz, J=9.7 Hz, 1H); 4.14 (t, J=8.2 Hz, 1H); 4.26 (d, J=4.7 Hz, 1H); 5.02-5.09 (m, 1H); 6.41 (dd, J=9.4 Hz, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 6.78 (d, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 7.18 (t, J=7.3 Hz, 1H); 7.26-7.43 (m, 12H); 8.29 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1H).
    • EXAMPLE 34D 2(R)-(Carboxymethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N—[(R)-α-methylbenzyl]amide
  • Example 25D (0.22 g, 0.35 mmol) was hydrolyzed to give 0.20 g (quantitative yield) of Example 34D as an off-white solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.59 (d, 3-7.0 Hz, 1H); 3.25 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 2H); 3.92 (t, J=7.3 Hz, 1H); 4.15 (t, J=8.3 Hz, 1H); 4.26 (d, J=5.0 Hz, 1H); 4.52 (dd, J=4.8 Hz, J=9.3 Hz, 1H); 4.65 (t, J=8.8 Hz, 1H); 4.72 (t, J=8.3 Hz, 1H); 5.07-5.28 (m, 1H); 6.29 (dd, J=9.5 Hz, J=15.6 Hz, 1H); 6.71 (d, J=16.0 Hz, 1H); 7.20-7.43 (m, 13H); 8.3.1 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H).
    • EXAMPLE 34E 2(R)-(Carboxymethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-methyl-N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide
  • Example 25E (0.253 g, 0.37 mmol) was hydrolyzed to give 0.232 g (quantitative yield) of Example 34E as an off-white solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 3.07-3.15 (m, 4H); 4.13 (t, J=8.2 Hz, 1H); 4.30 (d, J=4.9 Hz, 1H); 4.46-4.78 (m, 5H); 5.23 (dd, J=4.6 Hz, J=9.7 Hz, 1H); 6.20 (dd, J=9.4 Hz, J=15.9 Hz, 1H); 6.73 (d, J=15.9 Hz, 1H); 7.25-7.43 (m, 15H).
    • EXAMPLE 34F 2(S)-(Carboxyethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-chlorostyr-2-yl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide
  • Example 25F (0.707 g, 0.99 mmol) was hydrolyzed to give 0.648 g (99%) of Example 34F as an off-white solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 2.22-2.28 (m, 2H); 2.49-2.64 (m, 2H); 4.09 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H); 4.25-4.62 (m, 6H); 4.87 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H); 6.88 (s, 1H); 7.25-7.66 (m, 15H).
    • EXAMPLE 34G 2(R)-(Carboxymethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2′-methoxystyr-2-yl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide
  • Example 25G (0.268 g, 0.39 mmol) was hydrolyzed to give 0.242 g (98%) of Example 34G as an off-white solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 3.26 (d, J=7.1 Hz, 1H); 3.79 (s, 3H); 4.14 (t, J=8.2 Hz, 1H); 4.25 (d, J=4.5 Hz, 1H); 4.51 (dd, J=5.9 Hz, J=15.5 Hz, 1H); 4.53-4.66 (m, 4H); 6.36 (dd, J=9.4 Hz, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 8.88 (t, J=8.2 Hz, 1H); 6.70 (d, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 7.18 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 1H); 7.25-7.48 (m, 10H); 7.48 (s, 1H); 8.66-8.69 (m, 1H).
    • EXAMPLE 34H (2R)-(Benzyloxymethyl)-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid
  • Example 25H (0.16 g, 0.28 mmol) was hydrolyzed to give 0.144 g (quantitative yield) of Example 34H as an off-white solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 3.65 (dd, J=4.0 Hz, J=9.5 Hz, 1H); 3.82 (dd, J=5.5 Hz, J=9.5 Hz, 1H); 4.11 (dd, J=7.8 Hz, J=8.8 Hz, 1H); 4.33 (s, 2H); 4.50 (d, J=5.0 Hz, 1H); 4.57 (t, J=9.0 Hz, 1H); 4.67 (dd, J=4.0 Hz, J=5.0 Hz, 1H); 4.69 (dd, J=5.0 Hz, J=9.5 Hz, 1H); 4.75 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H); 6.17 (dd, J=9.3 Hz, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 6.55 (d, J=16.0 Hz, 1H); 7.09-7.12 (m, 2H); 7.19-7.42 (m, 13H).
    • EXAMPLE 35 2(S)-[4-(2-phenylethyl)piperazin-1-yl-carbonylethyl]-2-[3(S)-4(S) phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide
  • Using the procedure of Example 6, except that N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with the carboxylic acid of Example 29 and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with 4-(2-phenylethyl)piperazine, the title compound was prepared; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 2.21-2.23 (m, 1H); 2.25-2.45 (m, 6H); 2.52-2.63 (m, 3H); 2.72-2.82 (m, 2H); 3.42-3.48 (m, 2H); 3.52-3.58 (m, 1H); 4.13-4.18 (m, 1H); 4.26 (dd, J=5.1 Hz, J=8.3 Hz, 1H); 4.29 (d, J=5.0 Hz, 1H); 4.44 (dd, J=6.0 Hz, J=15.0 Hz, 1H); 4.54 (dd, J=6.2 Hz, J=14.9 Hz, 1H); 4.61-4.68 (m, 2H); 4.70-4.75 (m, 1H); 6.27 (dd, J=9.6 Hz, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 6.73 (d, J=15.8 Hz, 1H); 7.16-7.60 (m, 19H); 8.07-8.12 (m, 1H); FAB+ (M+H)+/z 794; Elemental Analysis calculated for C45H46F3N5O5: C, 68.08; H, 5.84; N, 8.82; found: C, 67.94; H, 5.90; N, 8.64.
  • Examples 36-42 and 42A, shown in Table 6, were prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 27, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine; all listed Examples exhibited an 1H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
    TABLE 6
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00024
    Example A′
    36 2-(piperidin-1-yl)ethylamino
    37 4-(piperidin-1-yl)piperidin-1-yl
    38 4-(2-phenylethyl)piperazin-1-yl
    39 1-benzylpiperidin-4-ylamino
    40 4-butylpiperazin-1-yl
    41 4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl
    42 4-cyclohexylpiperazin-1-yl
    42A 4-[2-(piperidin-1-yl)ethyl]piperidin-1-yl
  • Examples 43-86 and 86A, shown in Table 7, were prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 28, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine; all listed Examples exhibited an 1H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
    TABLE 7
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00025
    Example A′
    43 2-(piperidin-1-yl)ethylamino
    44 4-(piperidin-1-yl)piperidin-1-yl
    45 4-(phenylethyl)piperazin-1-yl
    46 fur-2-ylmethylamino
    47 4-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)piperazin-1-yl
    48 4-(3-trifluoromethylphenyl)piperazin-1-yl
    49 4-(benzyloxycarbonyl)piperazin-1-yl
    50 4-[2-(2-hydroxyethoxy)ethyl]piperazin-1-yl
    51 4-benzylpiperazin
    52 4-(3,4-methylenedioxybenzyl)piperazin-1-yl
    53 4-phenylpiperazin-1-yl
    54 4-(3-phenylprop-2-enyl)piperazin-1-yl
    55 4-ethylpiperazin-1-yl
    56 2-(dimethylamino)ethylamino
    57 4-(pyrrolidin-1-ylcarbonylmethyl)piperazin-1-yl
    58 4-(1-methylpiperidin-4-yl)pieprazin-1-yl
    59 4-butylpiperazin-1-yl
    60 4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl
    61 4-pyridylmethylamino
    62 3-(dimethylamino)propylamino
    63 1-benzylpiperidin-4-ylamino
    64 N-benzyl-2-(dimethylamino)ethylamino
    65 3-pyridylmethylamino
    66 4-(cyclohexyl)piperazin-1-yl
    67 4-(2-cyclohexylethyl)piperazin-1-yl
    68 4-[2-(morpholin-4-yl)ethyl]piperazin-1-yl
    69 4-(4-tert-butylbenzyl)piperazin-1-yl
    70 4-[2-(piperidin-1-yl)ethyl]piperazin-1-yl
    71 4-[3-(piperidin-1-yl)propyl]piperazin-1-yl
    72 4-[2-(N,N-dipropylamino)ethyl]piperazin-1-yl
    73 4-[3-(N,N-diethylamino)propyl]piperazin-1-yl
    74 4-[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]piperazin-1-yl
    75 4-[3-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)propyl]piperazin-1-yl
    76 4-(cyclohexylmethyl)piperazin-1-yl
    77 4-cyclopentylpiperazin-1-yl
    78 4-[2-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)ethyl]piperazin-1-yl
    79 4-[2-(thien-2-yl)ethyl]piperazin-1-yl
    80 4-(3-phenylpropyl)piperazin-1-yl
    81 4-[2-(N,N-diethylamino)ethyl]piperazin-1-yl
    82 4-benzylhomopiperazin-1-yl
    83 4-(bisphenylmethyl)piperazin-1-yl
    84 3-(4-methylpiperazin-1-yl)propylamino
    85 (+)-3(S)-1-benzylpyrrolidin-3-ylamino
    86 2-pyridylmethylamino
    86A 4-[2-(piperidin-1-yl)ethyl]piperazin-1-yl
  • Examples 87-120 and 120A-120D, shown in Table 8, Were prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 29, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine; all listed Examples exhibited an 1H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
    TABLE 8
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00026
    Example A′
    87 2-(piperidin-1-yl)ethylamino
    88 4-(piperidin-1-yl)piperidin-1-yl
    89 2-(pyrid-2-yl)ethylamino
    90 morpholin-4-ylamino
    91 4-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)piperazin-1-yl
    92 4-(3-trifluorophenyl)piperazin-1-yl
    93 4-(benzyloxycarbonyl)piperazin-1-yl
    94 4-[2-(2-hydroxylethoxy)ethyl]piperazin-1-yl
    95 4-benzylpiperazin-1-yl
    96 4-(3,4-methylenedioxybenzyl)piperazin-1-yl
    97 4-phenylpiperazin-1-yl
    98 4-(3-phenylprop-2-enyl)piperazin-1-yl
    99 4-ethylpiperazin-1-yl
    100 2-(dimethylamino)ethylamino
    101 4-(pyrrolidin-1-ylcarbonylmethyl)piperazin-1-yl
    102 4-(1-methylpiperidin-4-yl)piperazin-1-yl
    103 4-butylpiperazin-1-yl
    104 4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl
    105 4-pyridylmethylamino
    106 3-(dimethylamino)propylamino
    107 1-benzylpiperidin-4-ylamino
    108 N-benzyl-2-(dimethylamino)ethylamino
    109 3-pyridylmethylamino
    110 4-cyclohexylpiperazin-1-yl
    111 4-(2-cyclohexylethyl)piperazin-1-yl
    112 4-[2-(morpholin-4-yl)ethyl]piperazin-1-yl
    113 4-(4-tert-butylbenzyl)piperazin-1-yl
    114 4-[2-(piperidin-1-yl)ethyl]piperazin-1-yl
    115 4-[3-(piperidin-1-yl)propyl]piperazin-1-yl
    116 4-[2-(diisopropylamino)ethyl]piperazin-1-yl
    117 4-[3-(diethylamino)propyl]piperazin-1-yl
    118 4-(2-dimethylaminoethyl)piperazin-1-yl
    119 4-[3-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)propyl]piperazin-1-yl
    120 4-(cyclohexylmethyl)piperazin-1-yl
    120A 4-[2-(piperidin-1-yl)ethyl]piperidin-1-yl
    120B 4-propyl-piperazin-1-yl
    120C 4-[N-(isopropyl)acetamid-2-yl]piperazin-1-yl
    120D 3-benzyl-hexahydro-(1H)-1,3-diazepin-1-yl
  • Examples 121-132, shown in Table 9, were prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 30, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine; all listed Examples exhibited an 1H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
    TABLE 9
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00027
    Example A′
    121 3-trifluoromethylbenzylamino
    122 morpholin-4-ylamino
    123 2-(dimethylamino)ethylamino
    124 3-(dimethylamino)propylamino
    125 cyclohexylamino
    126 piperidin-1-yl
    127 2-methoxyethylamino
    128 isopropylamino
    129 isobutylamino
    130 ethylamino
    131 dimethylamino
    132 methylamino
  • Examples 133-134 and 134A-134F, shown in Table 10, were prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 32, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine; all listed Examples exhibited an 1H NMR assigned structure.
    TABLE 10
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00028
    Example A′
    133 4-(piperidin-1-yl)piperidin-1-yl
    134 4-(2-phenylethyl)piperazin-1-yl
    134A 4-[2-(piperidin-1-yl)ethyl]piperidin-1-yl
    134B 4-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)piperazin-1-yl
    134C 1-benzylpiperidin-4-ylamino
    134D (pyridin-3-ylmethyl)amino
    134E 3-(dimethylamino)propylamino
    134F 3-(S)-(1-benzylpyrrolidin-3-yl)amino
  • Examples 135-140, shown in Table 11, were prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 33, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine; all listed Examples exhibited an 1H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
    TABLE 11
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00029
    Example A′
    135 4-(piperidin-1-yl)piperidin-1-yl
    136 4-(2-phenylethyl)piperazin-1-yl
    137 4-butylpiperazin-1-yl
    138 4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl
    139 4-cyclohexylpiperazin-1-yl
    140 4-(cyclohexylmethyl)piperazin-1-yl
  • Examples 141-171, shown in Table 12, were prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 34, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine; all listed Examples exhibited an 1H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
    TABLE 12
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00030
    Example A′
    141 benzylamino
    142 (2-methylbenzyl)amino
    143 (3-methylbenzyl)amino
    144 (4-methylbenzyl)amino
    145 (α-methylbenzyl)amino
    146 N-benzyl-N-methylamino
    147 N-bezyl-N-(t-butyl)amino
    148 N-benzyl-N-butylamino
    149 (3,5-dimethylbenzyl)amino
    150 (2-phenylethyl)amino
    151 dimethylamino
    152 (3-trifluoromethoxybenzyl)amino
    153 (3,4-dichlorobenzyl)amino
    154 (3,5-dichlorobenzyl)amino
    155 (2,5-dichlorobenzyl)amino
    156 (2,3-dichlorobenzyl)amino
    157 (2-fluoro-5-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amino
    158 (4-fluoro-3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amino
    159 (3-fluoro-5-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amino
    160 (2-fluoro-3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amino
    161 (4-chloro-3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amino
    162 indan-1-ylamino
    163 4-(2-hydroxybenzimidazol-1-yl)-piperidin-1-yl
    164 3(S)-(tert-butylaminocarbonyl)-1,2,3,4-
    tetrahydroisoquinolin-2-yl
    165 (3,3-dimethylbutyl)amino
    166 4-hydroxy-4-phenylpiperidin-1-yl
    167 (cyclohexylmethyl)amino
    168 (2-phenoxyethyl)amino
    169 3,4-methylenedioxybenzylamino
    170 4-benzylpiperidin-1-yl
    171 (3-trifluoromethylphenyl)amino
  • Examples 172-221, shown in Table 13, were prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 34A, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine; all listed Examples exhibited an 1H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
    TABLE 13
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00031
    Example A
    172 (3-trifluoromethoxybenzyl)amino
    173 (3,4-dichlorobenzyl)amino
    174 (3,5-dichlorobenzyl)amino
    175 (2,5-dichlorobenzyl)amino
    176 (2,3-dichlorobenzyl)amino
    177 (2-fluoro-5-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amino
    178 (4-fluoro-3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amino
    179 (3-fluoro-5-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amino
    180 (2-fluoro-3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amino
    181 (4-chloro-3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amino
    182 (2-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amino
    183 (3-methoxybenzyl)amino
    184 (3-fluorobenzyl)amino
    185 (3,5-difluorobenzyl)amino
    186 (3-chloro-4-fluorobenzyl)amino
    187 (3-chlorobenzyl)amino
    188 [3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)benzyl]amino
    189 (3-nitrobenzyl)amino
    190 (3-bromobenzyl)amino
    191 benzylamino
    192 (2-methylbenzyl)amino
    193 (3-methylbenzyl)amino
    194 (4-methylbenzyl)amino
    195 (α-methylbenzyl)amino
    196 (N-methylbenzyl)amino
    197 (N-tert-butylbenzyl)amino
    198 (N-butylbenzyl)amino
    199 (3,5-dimethylbenzyl)amino
    200 (2-phenylethyl)amino
    201 (3,5-dimethoxybenzyl)amino
    202 (1R)-(3-methoxyphenyl)ethylamino
    203 (1S)-(3-methoxyphenyl)ethylamino
    204 (α,α-dimethylbenzyl)amino
    205 N-methyl-N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amino
    206 [(S)-α-methylbenzyl]amino
    207 (1-phenylcycloprop-1-yl)amino
    208 (pyridin-2-ylmethyl)amino
    209 (pyridin-3-ylmethyl)amino
    210 (pyridin-4-ylmethyl)amino
    211 (fur-2-ylmethyl)amino
    212 [(5-methylfur-2-yl)methyl]amino
    213 (thien-2-ylmethyl)amino
    214 [(S)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-1-naphth-1-yl]amino
    215 [(R)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-1-naphth-1-yl]amino
    216 (indan-1-yl)amino
    217 (1-phenylcyclopent-1-yl)amino
    218 (α,α-dimethyl-3,5-dimethoxybenzyl)amino
    219 (2,5-dimethoxybenzyl)amino
    220 (2-methoxybenzyl)amino
    221 (α,α,2-trimethylbenzyl)amino
    • EXAMPLE 222 2(R)-[[4-(Piperidin-1-yl)piperidin-1-yl]carbonylmethyl]-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(2-fluoro-3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)carboxamide
  • Example 222 was prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 34B, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with 4-(piperidin-1-yl)piperidine; Example 222 exhibited an 1H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
    • EXAMPLE 223 2(R)-[[4-(Piperidin-1-yl)piperidin-1-yl]carbonylmethyl]-2-[3 (S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N—[(S)-α-methylbenzyl]amide
  • Example 223 was prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 34C, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with 4-(piperidin-1-yl)piperidine; Example 223 exhibited an 1H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
    • EXAMPLE 224 2(R)-[[4-(Piperidin-1-yl)piperidin-1-yl]carbonylmethyl]-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N—[(R)-α-methylbenzyl]amide
  • Example 224 was prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 34D, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with 4-(piperidin-1-yl)piperidine; Example 223 exhibited an 1H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
    • EXAMPLE 225 2(R)-[[4-(Piperidin-1-yl)piperidin-1-yl]carbonylmethyl]-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-methyl-N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide
  • Example 225 was prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-1-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 34E, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with 4-(piperidin-1-yl)piperidine; Example 223 exhibited an 1H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
  • Examples 226-230, shown in Table 14, were prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 34F, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine; all listed Examples exhibited an 1H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
    TABLE 14
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00032
    Example A′
    226 4-cyclhexylpiperazin-1-yl
    227 4-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)piperazin-1-yl
    228 4-ethylpiperazin-1-yl
    229 4-n-butylpiperazin-1-yl
    230 4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl
    • EXAMPLE 231 2(R)-[[4-isopropylpiperazin-1-ylpiperidin-1-yl)piperidin-1-yl]carbonylmethyl]-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2′-methoxystyr-2-yl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide
  • Example 231 was prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 34G, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with 4-(piperidin-1-yl)piperidine; Example 231 exhibited an 1H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
  • Examples 232-233, shown in Table 15, were prepared using the procedure of Example 6, except that N-benzyloxycarbonyl-D-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester monohydrate was replaced with Example 34H, and 3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl amine was replaced with the appropriate amine; all listed Examples exhibited an 1H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
    TABLE 15
    Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00033
    Example A′
    232 4-(piperidin-1-yl)piperidin-1-yl
    233 4-[2-(piperidin-1-yl)ethyl]piperidin-1-yl
    • EXAMPLE 234 (2RS)-[4-(piperidin-1-yl)piperidin-1-ylcarbonyl]-2-methyl-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-styryl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide
  • Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00034
  • Example 37 (5-0 mg, 0.067 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (4 mL) was treated sequentially with sodium hydride (4 mg, 0.168 mmol) and methyl iodide (6 μL, 0.094 mmol) at −78° C. The resulting mixture was slowly warmed to ambient temperature, and evaporated. The resulting residue was partitioned between dichloromethane and water, and the organic layer was evaporated. The resulting residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (95:5 chloroform/methanol) to give 28 mg (55%) of the title compound as an off-white solid; MS (ES+): m/z=757 (M+).
    • EXAMPLE 235 2(S)-[[(1-Benzylpiperidin-4-yl)amino]carbonylmethyl]-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-phenyleth-1-yl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide
  • Example 235 was prepared using the procedure of Example 8, except that N-benzyloxycarbonyl-L-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-(3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide was replaced with Example 63 (50 mg, 0.064 mmol) to give 40 mg (80%) of Example 235 as an off-white solid; Example 235 exhibited an 1H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
    • EXAMPLE 236 (2S)-[(4-cyclohexylpiperazin-1-yl)carbonylethyl]-2-[3(S)-(4(S)-phenyloxazolidin-2-on-3-yl)-4(R)-(2-phenyleth-1-yl)azetidin-2-on-1-yl]acetic acid N-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyl)amide
  • Example 236 was prepared using the procedure of Example 8, except that N-benzyloxycarbonyl-L-aspartic acid β-t-butyl ester α-(3-trifluoromethyl)benzylamide was replaced with Example 110 (50 mg, 0.065 mmol) to give 42 mg (84%) of Example 236 as an off-white solid; Example 236 exhibited an 1H NMR spectrum consistent with the assigned structure.
  • Table 16 illustrates compounds further characterized by mass spectral analysis using FAB+ to observe the corresponding (M+H)+ parent ion.
    TABLE 16
    Example (m + H)+/z
     37 744
     38 766
     39 766
     40 718
     41 704
     42 744
     42A 772
     44 758
     63 780
     85 766
     86A 786
     88 772
     91 759
     95 780
     96 824
    104 732
    110 772
    111 800
    112 803
    120 786
    120A 800
    120B 732
    133 758
    134A 786
    134C 780
    136 794
    137 746
    138 732
    139 772
    174 772
    175 772
    176 772
    177 790
    179 790
    180 790
    182 772
    183 734
    184 722
    185 740
    186 756
    187 738
    188 840
    189 749
    190 782
    191 704
    192 718
    193 718
    199 732
    200 718
    201 764
    202 748
    203 748
    205 786
    206 718
    207 730
    208 705
    209 705
    210 705
    211 694
    212 708
    213 710
    214 744
    215 744
    216 7530
    217 758
    218 792
    219 764
    220 734
    221 746
    222 776
    224 704
    225 772
    226 806
    227 792
    228 752
    229 780
    230 766
    231 788
    232 663
    233 691
    234 758
    235 782
    236 774
    • METHOD EXAMPLE 1 Human Vasopression V1a Receptor Binding Assay
  • A cell line expressing the human V1a receptor in CHO cells (henceforth referred to as the hV1a cell line) was obtained from Dr. Michael Brownstein, NIMH, Bethesda, Md., USA. The hV1a cDNA sequence is described by Thibonnier et al., Journal of Biological Chemistry, 269, 3304-3310 (1994), and the expression method was the same as described by Morel et al. (1992). The hV1a cell line was grown in alpha-MEM with 10% fetal bovine serum and 250 ug/ml G418 (Gibco, Grand Island, N.Y., USA). For competitive binding assay, hV1a cells were plated into 6-well culture plate at 1:10 dilution from a confluency flask, and maintained in culture for at least two days. Culture medium was then removed, cells were washed with 2 ml binding buffer (25 mM Hepes, 0.25% ESA, 1×DMEM, PH=7.0). To each well, 990 μl binding buffer containing 1 nM 3H-AVP was added, and followed by 10 μl series diluted Example compounds dissolved in DMSO. All incubations were in triplicate, and dose-inhibition curves consisted of total binding (DMSO) and 5 concentrations (0.1, 1.0, 10, 100, and 1000 nM) of test agents encompassing the IC50. 100 nM cold AVP (Sigma) was used to assess non-specific binding. Cells were incubated for 45 minutes at 37° C., assay mixture was removed and each well was washed three times with PBS (pH=7.4). 1 ml 2% SDS was added per well and plates were let sit for 30 minutes. The whole content in a well was transferred to a scintillation vial. Each well was rinsed with 0.5 ml PBS which was then added to the corresponding vial. Scintillation fluid (Ecoscint, National Diagnostics, Atlanta, Ga.) was then added at 3 ml per vial. Samples were counted in a liquid scintillation counter (Beckman LS3801). IC50 values were calculated by Prism Curve fitting software.
  • All of the alkanedioic esters and amides exemplified in the foregoing examples were tested in this assay described of Example 201. Binding affinities for certain of the preferred compounds are summarized in the Table 17.
    TABLE 17
    V1a BINDING
    AFFINITY
    Example (IC50 (nM))
    18 35
    19 35
    20 35
    35 1.9
    37 5.5
    38 <25
    39 23
    40 11
    41 <20
    42 <20
    44 3.1
    47 ˜50
    59 <100
    63 1.84
    66 ˜50
    77 <100
    78 <100
    81 <100
    82 <50
    85 5.87
    87 15
    88 2.4
    91 3.24
    95 1.76
    96 4.35
    100 <100
    101 ˜100
    102 <100
    103 0.81
    104 1.85
    106 ˜100
    107 <50
    108 ˜100
    109 ˜100
    110 0.49
    111 1.31
    112 1.34
    120 0.75
    133 2.43
    135 ˜50
    136 11
    137 17
    138 21
    139 9.5
    • METHOD EXAMPLE 2 Inhibition of Phosphatidylinositol Turnover
  • The physiological effects of vasopressin are mediated through specific G-protein coupled receptors. The vasopressin V1a receptor is coupled to the Gq/G11 family of G proteins and mediates phosphatidylinositol turnover. The agonist or antagonist character of the compounds of the invention may be determined by their ability to inhibit vasopressin-mediated turnover of phosphatidylinositol by the procedure described in the following paragraphs. Representative compounds of the indention, the compounds of Examples 35, 44, 88, 110, and 133, were tested in this assay and found to be vasopressin V1a antagonists.
  • Cell Culture and Labeling of Cells.
  • Three days prior to the assay, near-confluent cultures of hV1a cells were dissociated and seeded in 6-well tissue culture plates, about 100 wells being seeded from each 75 cm2 flask (equivalent to 12:1 split ratio). Each well contained 1 mL of growth medium with 2 μCi of [3H]myo-inositol (American Radiolabeled Chemicals, St. Louis, Mo., USA).
  • Incubations
  • All assays were in triplicate except for basal and 10 nM AVP (both n=6). AVP ((arginine vasopressin), Peninsula Labs, Belmont, Calif., USA (#8103)) was dissolved in 0.1N acetic acid. Test agents were dissolved in DMSO and diluted in DMSO to 200 times the final test concentration. Test agents and AVP (or corresponding volumes of DMSO) were added separately as 5 μL in DMSO to 12×75 nm glass tubes containing 1 mL of assay buffer (Tyrode's balanced salt solution containing 50 mM glucose, 10 mM LiCl, 15 mM HEPES pH 7.4, 10 μM phosphoramidon, and 100 μM bacitracin). The order of incubations was randomized. Incubations were initiated by removing the prelabeling medium, washing the monolayer once with 1 mL of 0.9% NaCl, and transferring the contents of the assay tubes to corresponding wells. The plates were incubated for 1 hour at 37° C. Incubations were terminated by removing the incubation medium and adding 500 μL of ice cold 5% (w/v) trichloroacetic acid and allowing the wells to stand for 15 min.
  • Measurement of [3H]inositol Phosphates
  • BioRad Poly-Prep Econo-Columns were packed with 0.3 mL of AG 1 X-8 100-200 formate form resin. Resin was mixed 1:1 with water and 0.6 mL added to each column. Columns were then washed with 10 mL water. Scintillation vials (20 mL) were placed under each column. For each well, the contents were transferred to a minicolumn, after which the well was washed with 0.5 mL distilled water, which was also added to the minicolumn. The columns were then washed twice with 5 mL of 5 mM myo-inositol to elute free inositol. Aliquots (1 mL) were transferred to 20 mL scintillation vials and 10 mL of Beckman Ready Protein Plus added. After the myo-inositol wash was complete, empty scintillation vials were placed under the columns, and [3H]inositol phosphates were eluted with three additions of 1 mL 0.5 M ammonium formate containing 0.1 N formic acid. Elution conditions were optimized to recover inositol mono-, bis-, and trisphospliates, without eluting the more metabolically inert tetrakis-, pentakis-, and hexakis-phosphates. To each sample was added 10 mL of a high salt capacity scintillation fluid such as Tru-Count High Salt Capacity or Packard Hionic-Pluor. Inositol lipids were measured by adding 1 mL of 2% sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS) to each well, allowing the wells to stand for at least 30 min., and transferring the solution to 20 mL scintillation vials, to which 10 mL Beckman Ready Protein Plus scintillation fluid was then added. Samples were counted in a Beckman LS 3801 liquid scintillation counter for 10 min. Total inositol incorporation for each well was calculated as the sum of free inositol, inositol phosphates, and inositol lipids.
  • Data Analysis: Concentration-Inhibition Experiments
  • Concentration-response curves for AVP and concentration-inhibition curves for test agents versus 10 nM AVP were analyzed by nonlinear least-squares curve-fitting to a 4-parameter logistic function. Parameters for basal and maximal inositol phosphates, EC50 or IC50, and Hill coefficient were varied to achieve the best fit. The curve-fitting was weighted under the assumption that the standard deviation was proportional to dpm of radioactivity. Full concentration-response curves for AVP were run in each experiment, and IC50 values were converted to K; values by application of the Cheng-Prusoff equation, based on the EC50 for AVP in the same experiment. Inositol phosphates were expressed as dpm per 106 dpm of total inositol incorporation.
  • Data Analysis: Competitivity Experiments
  • Experiments to test for competitivity of test agents consisted of concentration-response curves for AVP in the absence and presence of two or more concentrations of test agent. Data were fit to a competitive logistic equation Y = B + M × { A / [ E + ( D / K ) ] } Q 1 + { A / [ E + ( D / F ) ] } Q
    where Y is dpm of inositol phosphates, B is concentration of basal inositol phosphates, M is the maximal increase in concentration of inositol phosphates, A is the concentration of agonist (AVP), E is the EC50 for agonist, D is the concentration of antagonist (test agent), K is the Ki for antagonist, and Q is the cooperativity (Hill coefficient).
  • Vasopressin V1a receptors are also known to mediate platelet aggregation Vasopressin V1a receptor agonists cause platelet aggregation, while vasopressin V1a receptor antagonists inhibit the platelet aggregation precipitated by vasopressin or vasopressin V1a agonists. The degree of antagonist activity of the compounds of the invention may be determined by the assay described in the following paragraphs.
  • Blood from healthy, human volunteers was collected by venipuncture and mixed with heparin (60 mL of blood added to 0.4 mL of heparanized saline solution (4 mg heparin/mL saline)). Platelet-rich plasma (PRP) was prepared by centrifuging whole blood (150×g), and indomethacin (3 μM) was added to PRP to block the thromboxane-mediated release reaction. PRP was continuously stirred at 37° C. and change in optical density was followed after the addition of arginine vasopressin (AVP) (30 nM) to initiate aggregation. Compounds were dissolved in 50% dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) and added (10 μL/415 μL PRP) before the addition of AVP. The percent inhibition of AVP-induced aggregation was measured and an IC50 calculated.
  • In studies using washed platelets, 50 mL of whole blood was mixed with 10 mL of citrate/heparin solution (85 mM sodium citrate, 64 mM citric acid, 111 mM glucose, 5 units/mL heparin) and PRP isolated as described above. PRP was then centrifuged (150×g) and the pellet resuspended in a physiologic buffer solution (10 mM HEPES, 135 mM sodium chloride, 5 mM potassium chloride, and 1 mM magnesium chloride) containing 10 μM indomethicin. Human fibrinogen (0.2 mg/mL) and calcium chloride (1 mM) were added to stirred platelets before initiating aggregation with AVP (30 nM) as previously described.
  • The activity of compounds of formula I in the antagonism of the vasopressin V1a receptor provides a method of antagonizing the vasopressin V1a receptor comprising administering to a subject in need of such treatment an effective amount of a compound of that formula. It is known that numerous physiological and therapeutic benefits are obtained through the administration of drugs that antagonize the vasopressin V1a receptor. These activities may be catagorized as peripheral and central. Peripheral utilities include administration of vasopressin V1a antagonists of formula I as adjuncts in heart failure or as antithrombotic agents. Central effects include administration of vasopressin V1a antagonists of formula I in the treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorder, aggressive disorders, depression and anxiety.
  • Obsessive-compulsive disease appears in a great variety of degrees and symptoms, generally linked by the victim's uncontrollable urge to perform heedless, ritualistic acts. Acts of acquiring, ordering, cleansing and the like, beyond any rational need or rationale, are the outward characteristic of the disease. A badly afflicted subject may be unable to do anything but carry out the rituals required by the disease. Obsessive-compulsive disease, in all its variations, is a preferred target of treatment with the present adjunctive therapy method and compositions. The utility of the compounds of Formula I in the treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorder was demonstrated as described in the following assay.
  • In golden hamsters, a particular stereotypy, flank marking behavior, can be induced by microinjections of vasopressin (10-100 mL, 1-100 μM) into the anterior hypothalamus (Ferris et al., Science, 224, 521-523 (1984); Albers and Ferris, Regulatory Peptides, 12, 257-260 (1985); Ferris et al., European Journal of Pharmacology, 154, 153-159 (1988)). Following the releasing stimulus, the behavior is initiated by grooming, licking and combing of the large sebaceous glands on the dorsolateral flanks. Bouts of flank gland grooming may be so intense that the flank region is left matted and soaked in saliva. After grooming, the hamsters display flank marking behavior, a type of scent marking involved in olfactory communication (Johnston, Physio. Behav., 51, 437-448 (1985); Ferris et al., Physio. Behav., 40, 661-664 (1987)), by arching the back and rubbing the flank glands vigorously against any vertical surface. Vasopressin-induced flank marking is usually induced within a minute after the microinjection (Ferris et al., Science, 224, 521-523 (1984)). The behavior is specific to vasopressin, as micro-injections of other neuropeptides, excitatory amino acids, and catecholamines do not elicit flank marking (Ferris et al., Science, 224, 521-523 (1984); Albers and Ferris, Regulatory Peptides, 12, 257-260 (1985)). Furthermore, flank marking is specific to the vasopressin V1 receptor, as the behavior is selectively inhibited by V1 receptor antagonists and activated by V1 receptor agonists (Ferris et al., Neuroscience Letters, 55, 239-243 (1985); Albers et al., Journal of Neuroscience, 6, 2085-2089 (1986); Ferris et al., European Journal of Pharmacology, 154, 153-159 (1988)).
  • All animals were adult male golden hamsters (Mesocricetus auratus) weighing approximately 160 gm. The animals underwent stereotaxic surgery, and were allowed to recover before behavioral testing. The hamsters were kept on a reverse light cycle (14 hr light, 10 hr dark, lights on at 19:00) in Plexiglas™ cages, and received food and water ad libitum.
  • Stereotaxic surgery was performed under pentobarbital anesthesia. The stereotaxic coordinates were: 1.1 mm anterior to the bregma, 1.8 mm lateral to the midsagittal suture at an 8° angle from the vertical line, and 4.5 nm n below the dura. The nose bar was placed at the level of the interaural line. An unilateral 26-gauge guide cannula was lowered to the site and secured to the skull with dental cement. The guide cannulae were closed with a 33-gauge obturator extending 1 mm beyond the guide. The innercanulae used for the microinjections extended 3.0 mm beyond the guide to reach the anterior hypothalamus.
  • The hamsters were microinjected with 1 μM vasopressin in a volume of 150 nL. The vasopressin was given as a cocktail with 200 mM, 20 mM, 2 mM of the test compound or alone, in the vehicle, dimethylsulfoxide. Both the vasopressin and the test compound were dissolved in 100% dimethylsulfoxide. All injections were aimed at the anterior hypothalamus. Animals were scored for flank marking for a period of 10 minutes in a clean cage.
  • Another aspect of this invention is the use of compounds of formula I in combination with a serotonin reuptake inhibitor for use in the treatment of obsessive-compulsive disease, aggressive disorder, or depression. Compounds useful as serotonin reuptake inhibitors include but are not limited to:
  • Fluoxetine, N-methyl-3-(pt-trifluoromethylphenoxy)-3-phenylpropylamine, is marketed in the hydrochloride salt form, and as the racemic mixture of its two enantiomers. U.S. Pat. No. 4,314,081 is an early reference on the compound. Robertson et al., J. Med. Chem., 31, 1412 (1988), taught the separation of the R and S enantiomers of fluoxetine and showed that their activity as serotonin uptake inhibitors is similar to each other. In this document, the word “fluoxetine” will be used to mean any acid addition salt or the free base, and to include either the racemic mixture or either of the R and S enantiomers;
  • Duloxetine, N-methyl-3-(1-naphthalenyloxy)-3-(2-thienyl)propanamine, is usually administered as the hydrochloride salt and as the (+) enantiomer. It was first taught by U.S. Pat. No. 4,956,388, which shows its high potency. The word “duloxetine” will be used here to refer to any acid addition salt or the free base of the molecule;
  • Venlafaxine is known in the literature, and its method of synthesis and its activity as an inhibitor of serotonin and norepinephrine uptake are taught by U.S. Pat. No. 4,761,501. Venlafaxine is identified as compound A in that patent;
  • Milnacipran (N,N-diethyl-2-aminomethyl-1-phenylcyclopropanecarboxamide) is taught by U.S. Pat. No. 4,478,836, which prepared milnacipran as its Example 4. The patent describes its compounds as antidepressants. Moret et al., Neuropharmacology, 24, 1211-19 (1985), describe its pharmacological activities as an inhibitor of serotonin and norepinephrine reuptake;
  • Citalopram, 1-[3-(dimethylamino)propyl]-1-(4-fluorophenyl)-1,3-dihydro-5-isobenzofurancarbonitrile, is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,136,193 as a serotonin reuptake inhibitor. Its pharmacology was disclosed by Christensen et al., Eur. J. Pharmacol., 41, 153 (1977), and reports of its clinical effectiveness in depression may be found in Dufour et al., Int. Clin. Psychopharmacol., 2, 225 (1987), and Timmerman et al., ibid., 239;
  • Fluvoxamine, 5-methoxy-1-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1-pentanone O-(2-aminoethyl)oxime, is taught by U.S. Pat. No. 4,085,225. Scientific articles about the drug have been published by Claassen et al., Brit. J. Pharmacol., 60, 505 (1977); and De Wilde et al., J. Affective Disord., 4, 249 (1982); and Benfield et al., Drugs, 32, 313 (1986);
  • Paroxetine, trans-(−)-3-[(1,3-benzodioxol-5-yloxy)methyl]-4-(4-fluorophenyl)piperidine, may be found in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,912,743 and 4,007,196. Reports of the drug's activity are in Lassen, Eur. J. Pharmacol., 47, 351 (1978); Hassan et al., Brit. J. Clin. Pharmacol., 19, 705 (1985); Laursen et al., Acta Psychiat. Scand., 71, 249 (1985); and Battegay et al., Neuropsychobiology, 13, 31 (1985); and
  • Sertraline, (1S-cis)-4-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-N-methyl-1-naphthylamine hydrochloride, a serotonin reuptake inhibitor disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,536,518, is marketed as an antidepressant.
  • All of the above-referenced patents are hereby incorporated by reference.
  • The adjunctive therapy of this aspect of the present invention is carried out by administering a vasopressin V1a antagonist together with a serotonin reuptake inhibitor in any manner that provides effective levels of the compounds in the body at the same time. All of the compounds concerned are orally available and are normally administered orally, and so oral administration of the adjunctive combination is preferred. They may be administered together, in a single dosage form, or may be administered separately.
  • This aspect of the present invention provides a potentiation of the decrease in the concentration of vasopressin observed as an effect of administration of a vasopressin V1a antagonist by administration of a serotonin reuptake inhibitor. This aspect of the present invention is particularly suited for use in the treatment of depression and obsessive compulsive disorder. Such disorders may often be resistant to treatment with a serotonin reuptake inhibitor alone.
    • METHOD EXAMPLE 3 Human Oxytocin Binding and Functional Assay
  • Compounds of the present invention are believed to be oxytocin agents. Oxytocin preparations and a number of oxytocin agonists are commercially available for therapeutic use. In recent years, oxytocin antagonists with antiuterotonic activity have been developed and evaluated for their potential use in the treatment of preterm labor and dysmenorrhyea (Pavo et al., J. Med. Chem., 37, 255-259 (1994); Akerlund et al., Br. J. Obstet. Gynaecol., 94, 1040-1044 (1987); Akerlund et al., Br. J. Obstet. Gynaecol., 86, 484-487 (1979)). The oxytocin antagonist atosiban has been studied clinically and resulted in a more significant inhibition of preterm contractions than did placebo (Goodwin et al., Am. J. Obstet. Gynecol., 170, 474 (1994)).
  • The human oxytocin receptor has been cloned and expressed (Kimura et al., Nature, 356, 526-529 (1992)), it is identified under the accession number X64878. To demonstrate the affinity of the compounds of the present invention for the human oxydocin receptor, binding studies were performed using a cell line expressing the human oxytocin receptor in 293 cells (henceforth referred to as the OTR cell line) substantially by the procedure described by Morel et al. (Nature, 356, 523-526 (1992)). The 293 cell line is a permanent line of primary human embryonal kidney cells transformed by sheared human adenovirus type t DNA. It is identified as ATCC CRL-1533.
  • The OTR cell line was grown in DMEM (Delbecco's Modified Essential Medium, Sigma, St. Louis, Mo., USA) with 10% fetal bovine serum, 2 mM L-glutamine, 200 μg hygromycin (Sigma, St. Louis, Mo., USA) and 250 μg/ml G418 (Gibco, Grand Island, N.Y., USA). To prepare membranes, OTR cells were grown to confluency in 20 roller bottles. Cells were dissociated with enzyme-free cell dissociation medium (Specialty Media, Lavallette, N.J., USA) and centrifuged at 3200 rpm for 15 minutes. The pellet was resuspended in 40 mL of Tris-HCl (tris[hydroxymethyl]aminomethane hydro-chloride) buffer (50 mM, pH 7.4) and homogenized for 1 minute with a Tekmar Tissumizer (Cincinnatti, Ohio USA). The suspension was centrifuged at 40,000×g for 10 minutes. The pellet was resuspended and centrifuged as above. The final pellet was suspended in 80 mL of Tris 7.4 buffer and stored in 4 mL aliquots at −80° C. For assay, aliquots were resuspended in assay buffer and diluted to 375 μg protein per mL. Protein concentration was determined by BCA assay (Pierce, Rockford, Ill., USA).
  • Assay buffer was 50 mM Tris-HCl (tris[hydroxymethyl]aminomethane hydrochloride), 5 mM MgCl2, and 0.1% bovine serum albumin at pH 7.4. The radioligand for binding assays was [3H]oxytocin ([tyrosyl-2,6-3H]oxytocin, 48.5 Ci/mmol, DuPont NEN, Boston, Mass., USA). The order of additions was 195 μL assay buffer, 200 μL OTR membranes (75 μg protein) in assay buffer, 5 μL of test agent in dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) or DMSO alone, and 100 μL [3 H]oxytocin in assay buffer (final concentration 1.0 nM). Incubations were for one hour at room temperature. Bound radioligand was separated from free by filtration on a Brandel cell harvester (Gaithersburg, Md., USA) through Whatman GF/B glass-fiber filters that had been soaked for 2 hours in 0.3% polyethylenimine. The filters were washed with ice-cold 50 mM Tris-HCl (pH 7.7 at 25° C.) and the filter circles were placed in scintillation vials, to which were then added 5 mL Ready Protein Plus™ scintillation fluid, and counted in a liquid scintillation counter. All incubations were in triplicate, and dose-inhibition curves consisted of total binding, nonspecific binding (100 μM oxytocin, Sigma, St. Louis, Mo., USA), and 6 or 7 concentrations of test agent encompassing the IC50. Total binding was typically about 1,000 cpm and nonspecific binding about 200 cpm. IC50 values were calculated by nonlinear least-squares curve-fitting to a 4-parameter logistic model. Certain compounds of formula I have shown affinity for the oxytocin receptor.
  • Several bioassays are available to determine the agonist or antagonist character of compounds exhibiting affinity at the oxytocin receptor. One such assay is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,373,089, hereby incorporated by reference. Said bioassay is derived from procedures described in a paper by Sawyer et al. (Endocrinology, 106, 81 (1980)), which in turn was based on a report of Holton (Brit. J. Pharmacol., 3, 328 (1948)). The assay calculations for pA2 estimates are described by Schild (Brit. J. Pharmacol., 2, 189 (1947)).
  • Assay Method
  • 1. Animals-a 1.5 cm piece of uterus from a virgin rat (Holtzman) in natural estrus is used for the assay.
  • 2. Buffer/Assay Bath—The buffer used is Munsicks. This buffer contains 0.5 mM Mg2+. The buffer is gassed continuously with 95% oxygen/5% carbon dioxide giving a pH of 7.4. The temperature of the assay bath is 37° C. A 10 mL assay bath is used that contains a water jacket for maintaining the temperature and inlet and outlet spikets for adding and removing buffer.
  • 3. Polygraph/transducer—The piece of uterine tissue used for the assay is anchored at one end and connected to a Statham Strain Gauge Force Transducer at the other end which in turn is attached to a Grass Polygraph Model 79 for monitoring the contractions.
  • 4. Assay Protocol:
  • (a) The tissue is equilibrated in the assay bath for one hour with washing with new buffer every 15 minutes. One gram of tension is kept on the tissue at all times.
  • (b) The tissue is stimulated initially with oxytocin at 10 nM to acclimate the tissue and with 4 mM potassium chloride (KCl) to determine the maximum contractile response.
  • (c) A cumulative dose response curve is then done with oxytocin and a concentration of oxytocin equivalent to approximately 80% of the maximum is used for estimating the pA2 of the antagonist.
  • (d) The tissue is exposed to oxytocin (Calbiochemical, San Diego, Calif.) for one minute and washed out. There is a three minute interval before addition of the next dose of agonist or antagonist. When the antagonist is tested, it is given five minutes before the agonist. The agonist is given for one minute. All responses are integrated using a 7P10 Grass Integrator. A single concentration of oxytocin, equal to 80% of the maximum response, is used to test the antagonist. Three different concentrations of antagonists are used, two that will reduce the response to the agonist by less than 50% and one that will reduce the response greater than 50% (ideally this relation would be 25%, 50% and 75%). This is repeated three times for each dose of antagonist for a three point assay.
  • (e) Calculations for pA2—The dose-response (DR) ratios are calculated for antagonist and a Schild's Plot is performed by plotting the Log (DR-1) vs. Log of antagonist concentration. The line plotted is calculated by least-squares regression analysis. The pA2 is the concentration of antagonist at the point where the regression line crosses the 0 point of the Log (DR-1) ordinate. The pA2 is the negative Log of the concentration of antagonist that will reduce the response to the agonist by one-half.
  • Oxytocin is well known for its hormonal role in parturition and lactation. Oxytocin agonists are useful clinically to induce lactation; induce or augment labor; control postpartum uterine atony and hemmorhage; cause uterine contraction after cesarean section or during other uterine surgery; and to induce therapeutic abortion. Oxytocin, acting as a neurotransmitter in the central nervous system, also plays an important role in the expression of central functions such as maternal behavior, sexual behavior (including penile erection, lordosis and copulatory behavior), yawning, tolerance and dependance mechanisms, feeding, grooming, cardiovascular regulation and thermoregulation (Argiolas and Gessa, Neuroscience and Biobehavioral Reviews, 15, 217-231 (1991)). Oxytocin antagonists find therapeutic utility as agents for the delay or prevention of premature labor; or to slow or arrest delivery for brief periods in order to undertake other therapeutic measures.
    • METHOD EXAMPLE 4 Tachykinin Receptor Binding Assay
  • Compounds of the present invention are believed to be tachykinin agents. Tachykinins are a family of peptides which share a common amidated carboxy terminal sequence. Substance P was the first peptide of this family to be isolated, although its purification and the determination of its primary sequence did not occur until the early 1970's. Between 1983 and 1984 several groups reported the isolation of two novel mammalian tachykinins, now termed neurokinin A (also known as substance K, neuromedin 1, and neurokinin α), and neurokinin B (also known as neuromedin K and neurokinin β). S, J. E. Maggio, Peptides, 6 (Supplement 3), 237-243 (1985) for a review of these discoveries.
  • Tachykinins are widely distributed in both the central and peripheral nervous systems. When released from nerves, they exert a variety of biological actions, which, in most cases, depend upon activation of specific receptors expressed on the membrane of target cells. Tachykinins are also produced by a number of non-neural tissues. The mammalian tachykinins substance P, neurokinin A, and neurokinin B act through three major receptor subtypes, denoted as NK-1, NK-2, and NK-3, respectively. These receptors are present in a variety of organs.
  • Substance P is believed inter alia to be involved in the neurotransmission of pain sensations, including the pain associated with migraine headaches and with arthritis. These peptides have also been implicated in gastrointestinal disorders and diseases of the gastrointestinal tract such as inflammatory bowel disease. Tachykinins have also been implicated as playing a role in numerous other maladies, as discussed infra.
  • In view of the wide number of clinical maladies associated with an excess of tachykinins, the development of tachykinin receptor antagonists will serve to control these clinical conditions. The earliest tachykinin receptor antagonists were peptide derivatives. These antagonists proved to be of limited pharmaceutical utility because of their metabolic instability. Recent publications have described novel classes of non-peptidyl tachykinin receptor antagonists which generally have greater oral bioavailability and metabolic stability than the earlier classes of tachykinin receptor antagonists. Examples of such newer non-peptidyl tachykinin receptor antagonists are found in European Patent Publication 591,040 A1, published Apr. 6, 1994; Patent Cooperation Treaty publication WO 94/01402, published Jan. 20, 1994; Patent Cooperation Treaty publication WO 94/04494, published Mar. 3, 1994; Patent Cooperation Treaty publication WO 93/011609, published Jan. 21, 1993, Patent Cooperation Treaty publication WO 94/26735, published Nov. 24, 1994. Assays useful for evaluating tachykinin receptor antagonists are well known in the art. See, e.g., J. Jukic et al., Life Sciences, 49, 1463-1469 (1991); N. Kucharczyk et al., Journal of Medicinal Chemistry, 36, 1654-1661 (1993); N. Rouissi et al., Biochemical and Biophysical Research Communications, 176, 894-901 (1991).
    • METHOD EXAMPLE 5 NK-1 Receptor Binding Assay
  • Radioreceptor binding assays were performed using a derivative of a previously published protocol. D. G. Payan et al., Journal of Immunology, 133, 3260-3265 (1984). In this assay an aliquot of IM9 cells (1×106 cells/tube in RPMI 1604 medium supplemented with 10% fetal calf serum) was incubated with 20 μM 125I-labeled substance P in the presence of increasing competitor concentrations for 45 minutes at 4° C.
  • The IM9 cell line is a well-characterized cell line which is readily available to the public. See, e.g., Annals of the New York Academy of Science, 190, 221-234 (1972); Nature (London), 251, 443-444 (1974); Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences (USA), 71, 84-88 (1974). These cells were routinely cultured in RPMI 1640 supplemented with 50 μg/mL gentamicin sulfate and 10% fetal calf serum.
  • The reaction was terminated by filtration through a glass fiber filter harvesting system using filters previously soaked for 20 minutes in 0.1% polyethylenimine. Specific binding of labeled substance P was determined in the presence of 20 nM unlabeled ligand.
    • METHOD EXAMPLE 6 NK-2 Receptor Binding Assay
  • The CHO-hNK-2R cells, a CHO-derived cell line transformed with the human NK-2 receptor, expressing about 400,000 such receptors per cell, were grown in 75 cm2 flasks or roller bottles in minimal essential medium (alpha modification) with 10% fetal bovine serum. The gene sequence of the human NK-2 receptor is given in N. P. Gerard et al., Journal of Biological Chemistry, 265, 20455-20462 (1990).
  • For preparation of membranes, 30 confluent roller bottle cultures were dissociated by washing each roller bottle with 10 ml of Dulbecco's phosphate buffered saline (PBS) without calcium and magnesium, followed by addition of 10 ml of enzyme-free cell dissociation solution (PBS-based, from Specialty Media, Inc.). After an additional 15 minutes, the dissociated cells were pooled and centrifuged at 1,000 RPM for 10 minutes in a clinical centrifuge. Membranes were prepared by homogenization of the cell pellets in 300 mL 50 mM-Tris buffer, pH 7.4 with a Tekmar® homogenizer for 10-15 seconds, followed by centrifugation at 12,000 RPM (20,000×g) for 30 minutes using a Beckman JA-14® rotor. The pellets were washed once using the above procedure and the final pellets were resuspended in 100-120 mL 50 mM Tris buffer, pH 7.4, and 4 ml aliquots stored frozen at −70° C. The protein concentration of this preparation was 2 mg/mL.
  • For the receptor binding assay, one 4-mL aliquot of the CHO-hNK-2R membrane preparation was suspended in 40 mL of assay buffer containing 50 mM Tris, pH 7.4, 3 mM manganese chloride, 0.02% bovine serum albumin (BSA) and 4 μg/mL chymostatin. A 200 μL volume of the homogenate (40 μg protein) was used per sample. The radioactive ligand was [125I]iodohistidyl-neurokinin A (New England Nuclear, NEX-252), 2200 Ci/mmol. The ligand was prepared in assay buffer at 20 nCi per 100 μL; the final concentration in the assay was 20 pM. Non-specific binding was determined using 1 μM eledoisin. Ten concentrations of eledoisin from 0.1 to 1000 nM were used for a standard concentration-response curve.
  • All samples and standards were added to the incubation in 10 μL dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) for screening (single dose) or in 5 μL DMSO for IC50 determinations. The order of additions for incubation was 190 or 195 μL assay buffer, 200 μL homogenate, 10 or 5 μL sample in DMSO, 100 μL radioactive ligand. The samples were incubated 1 hr at room temperature and then filtered on a cell harvester through filters which had been presoaked for two hours in 50 mM Tris buffer, pH 7.7, containing 0.5% BSA. The filter was washed 3 times with approximately 3 mL of cold 50 mM. Tris buffer, pH 7.7. The filter circles were then punched into 12×75 mm polystyrene tubes and counted in a gamma counter.
  • Tachykinin receptor antagonists are of value in the treatment of a wide variety of clinical conditions which are characterized by the presence of an excess of tachykinin. These clinical conditions may include disorders of the central nervous system such as anxiety, depression, psychosis, and schizophrenia; neurodegenerative disorders such as dementia, including senile dementia of the Alzheimer's type, Alzheimer's disease, AIDS-associated dementia, and Down's syndrome; demyelinating diseases such as multiple sclerosis and amyotrophic lateral sclerosis and other neuropathological disorders such as peripheral neuropathy, such as diabetic and chemotherapy-induced neuropathy, and post-herpetic and other neuralgias; acute and chronic obstructive airway diseases such as adult respiratory distress syndrome, bronchopneumonia, bronchospasm, chronic bronchitis, drivercough, and asthma; inflammatory diseases such as inflammatory bowel disease, psoriasis, fibrositis, osteoarthritis, and rheumatoid arthritis; disorders of the musculo-skeletal system, such as osteoporosis; allergies such as eczema and rhinitis; hypersensitivity disorders such as poison ivy; ophthalmic diseases such as conjunctivitis, vernal conjunctivitis, and the like; cutaneous diseases such as contact dermatitis, atopic dermatitis, urticaria, and other eczematoid dermatites; addiction disorders such as alcoholism; stress-related somatic disorders; reflex sympathetic dystrophy such as shoulder/hand syndrome; dysthymic disorders; adverse immunological reactions such as rejection of transplanted tissues and disorders related to immune enhancement or suppression such as systemic lupus erythematosis; gastrointestinal disorders or diseases associated with the neuronal control of viscera such as ulcerative colitis, Crohn's disease, emesis, and irritable bowel syndrome; disorders of bladder function such as bladder detrusor hyper-reflexia and incontinence; artherosclerosis; fibrosing and collagen diseases such as scleroderma and eosinophilic fascioliasis; irritative symptoms of benign prostatic hypertrophy; disorders of blood flow caused by vasodilation and vasospastic diseases such as angina, migraine, and Raynaud's disease; and pain or nociception, for example, that attributable to or associated with any of the foregoing conditions, especially the transmission of pain in migraine.
  • NK-1 antagonists are useful in the treatment of pain, especially chronic pain, such as neuropathic pain, post-operative pain, and migraines, pain associated with arthritis, cancer-associated pain, chronic lower back pain, cluster headaches, herpes neuralgia, phantom limb pain, central pain, dental pain, neuropathic pain, opioid-resistant pain, visceral pain, surgical pain, bone injury pain, pain during labor and delivery, pain resulting from burns, including sunburn, post partum pain, angina pain, and genitourinary tract-related pain including cystitis.
  • In addition to pain, NK-1 antagonists are especially useful in the treatment and prevention of urinary incontinence; irritative symptoms of benign prostatic hypertrophy; motility disorders of the gastrointestinal tract, such as irritable bowel syndrome; acute and chronic obstructive airway diseases, such as bronchospasm, bronchopneumonia, asthma, and adult respiratory distress syndrome; artherosclerosis; inflammatory conditions, such as inflammatory bowel disease, ulcerative colitis, Crohn's disease, rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis, neurogenic inflammation, allergies, rhinitis, cough, dermatitis, urticaria, psoriasis, conjunctivitis, emesis, irritation-induced miosis; tissue transplant rejection; plasma extravasation resulting from cytokine chemotherapy and the like; spinal cord trauma; stroke; cerebral stroke (ischemia); Alzheimer's disease; Parkinson's disease; multiple sclerosis; amyotrophic lateral sclerosis; schizophrenia; anxiety; and depression.
  • NK-2 antagonists are useful in the treatment of urinary incontinence, bronchospasm, asthma, adult respiratory distress syndrome, motility disorders of the gastrointestinal tract, such as irritable bowel syndrome, and pain.
  • In addition to the above indications the compounds of the invention may be useful in the treatment of emesis, including acute, delayed, or anticipatory emesis, such as emesis induced by chemotherapy, radiation, toxins, pregnancy, vestibular disorders, motion, surgery, migraine, and variations in intercranial pressure. Most especially, the compounds of formula I are of use in the treatment of emesis induced by antineoplastic (cytotoxic) agents including those routinely used in cancer chemotherapy.
  • Examples of such chemotherapeutic agents include alkylating agents, for example, nitrogen mustards, ethyleneimine compounds, alkyl sulfonates, and other compounds with an alkylating action, such as nitrosoureas, cisplatin, and dacarbazine; antimetabolites, for example, folic acid, purine, or pyrimidine antagonists; mitotic inhibitors, for example vinca alkaloids and derivatives of podophyllotoxin; and cytotoxic antibiotics.
  • Particular examples of chemotherapeutic agents are described, for instance, by D. J. Stewart in NAUSEA AND VOMITING: RECENT RESEARCH AND CLINICAL ADVANCES, (J. Kucharczyk et al., eds., 1991), at pages 177-203. Commonly used chemotherapeutic agents include cisplatin, dacarbazine (DTIC), dactinomycin, mechlorethamine (nitrogen mustard), streptozocin, cyclophosphamide, carmustine (BCNU), lomustine (CCNU), doxorubicin, daunorubicin, procarbazine, mitomycin, cytarabine, etoposide, methotrexate, 5-fluorouracil, vinblastine, vincristine, bleomycin, and chlorambucil. R. J. Gralla et al., Cancer Treatment Reports, 68, 163-172 (1984).
  • The compounds of formula I may also be of use in the treatment of emesis induced by radiation, including radiation therapy such as in the treatment of cancer, or radiation sickness; and in the treatment of post-operative nausea and vomiting.
  • While it is possible to administer a compound employed in the methods of this invention directly without any formulation, the compounds are usually administered in the form of pharmaceutical compositions comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient and at least one active ingredient. These compositions can be administered by a variety of routes including oral, rectal, transdermal, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, and intranasal. Many of the compounds employed in the methods of this invention are effective as both injectable and oral compositions. Such compositions are prepared in a manner well known in the pharmaceutical art and comprise at least one active compound. See, e.g., REMINGTON'S PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES, (16th ed. 1980).
  • In making the compositions employed in the present invention the active ingredient is usually mixed with an excipient, diluted by an excipient, or enclosed within such a carrier which can be in the form of a capsule, sachet, paper, or other container. When the excipient serves as a diluent, it can be a solid, semi-solid, or liquid material, which acts as a vehicle, carrier or medium for the active ingredient. Thus, the compositions can be in the form of tablets, pills, powders, lozenges, sachets, cachets, elixirs, suspensions, emulsions, solutions, syrups, aerosols (as a solid or in a liquid medium), ointments containing for example up to 10% by weight of the active compound, soft and hard gelatin capsules, suppositories, sterile injectable solutions, and sterile packaged powders.
  • In preparing a formulation, it may be necessary to mill the active compound to provide the appropriate particle size prior to combining with the other ingredients. If the active compound is substantially insoluble, it ordinarily is milled to a particle size of less than 200 mesh. If the active compound is substantially water soluble, the particle size is normally adjusted by milling to provide a substantially uniform distribution in the formulation, e.g. about 40 mesh.
  • Some examples of suitable excipients include lactose, dextrose, sucrose, sorbitol, mannitol, starches, gum acacia, calcium phosphate, alginates, tragacanth, gelatin, calcium silicate, microcrystalline cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, cellulose, water, syrup, and methyl cellulose. The formulations can additionally include: lubricating agents such as talc, magnesium stearate, and mineral oil; wetting agents; emulsifying and suspending agents; preserving agents such as methyl- and propylhydroxybenzoates; sweetening agents; and flavoring agents. The compositions of the invention can be formulated so as to provide quick, sustained or delayed release of the active ingredient after administration to the patient by employing procedures known in the art.
  • The compositions are preferably formulated in a unit dosage form, each dosage containing from about 0.05 to about 100 mg, more usually about 1.0 to about 30 mg, of the active ingredient. The term “unit dosage form” refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects and other mammals, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with a suitable pharmaceutical excipient.
  • The active compounds are generally effective over a wide dosage range. For examples, dosages per day normally fall within the range of about 0.01 to about 30 mg/kg of body weight. In the treatment of adult humans, the range of about 0.1 to about 15 mg/kg/day, in single or divided dose, is especially preferred. However, it will be understood that the amount of the compound actually administered will be determined by a physician, in the light of the relevant circumstances, including the condition to be treated, the chosen route of administration, the actual compound or compounds administered, the age, weight, and response of the individual patient, and the severity of the patient's symptoms, and therefore the above dosage ranges are not intended to limit the scope of the invention in any way. In some instances dosage levels below the lower limit of the aforesaid range may be more than adequate, while in other cases still larger doses may be employed without causing any harmful side effect, provided that such larger doses are first divided into several smaller doses for administration throughout the day.
    • FORMULATION EXAMPLE 1
  • Hard gelatin capsules containing the following ingredients are prepared:
    Quantity
    Ingredient (mg/capsule)
    Compound of Example 35 30.0
    Starch 305.0
    Magnesium stearate 5.0

    The above ingredients are mixed and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 340 mg quantities.
    • FORMULATION EXAMPLE 2
  • A tablet formula is prepared using the ingredients below:
    Quantity
    Ingredient (mg/tablet)
    Compound of Example 95 25.0
    Cellulose, microcrystalline 200.0
    Colloidal silicon dioxide 10.0
    Stearic acid 5.0

    The components are blended and compressed to form tablets, each weighing 240 mg.
    • FORMULATION EXAMPLE 3
  • A dry powder inhaler formulation is prepared containing the following components:
    Ingredient Weight %
    Compound of Example 63 5
    Lactose 95

    The active mixture is mixed with the lactose and the mixture is added to a dry powder inhaling appliance.
    • FORMULATION EXAMPLE 4
  • Tablets, each containing 30 mg of active ingredient, are prepared as follows:
    Quantity
    Ingredient (mg/tablet)
    Compound of Example 103 30.0 mg 
    Starch 45.0 mg 
    Microcrystalline cellulose 35.0 mg 
    Polyvinylpyrrolidone (as 10% solution in water) 4.0 mg
    Sodium carboxymethyl starch 4.5 mg
    Magnesium stearate 0.5 mg
    Talc 1.0 mg
    Total 120 mg 

    The active ingredient, starch, and cellulose are passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve and mixed thoroughly. The solution of polyvinylpyrrolidone is mixed with the resultant powders, which are then passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve. The granules so produced are dried at 50-60° C. and passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve. The sodium carboxymethyl starch, magnesium stearate, and talc, previously passed through a No. 30 mesh U.S. sieve, are then added to the granules which, after mixing, are compressed on a tablet machine to yield tablets each weighing 120 mg.
    • FORMULATION EXAMPLE 5
  • Capsules, each containing 40 mg of medicament are made as follows:
    Quantity
    Ingredient (mg/capsule)
    Compound of Example 104  40.0 mg
    Starch 109.0 mg
    Magnesium stearate  1.0 mg
    Total 150.0 mg

    The active ingredient, cellulose, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 150 mg quantities.
    • FORMULATION EXAMPLE 6
  • Suppositories, each containing 25 mg of active ingredient are made as follows:
    Ingredient Amount
    Compound of Example 110   25 mg
    Saturated fatty acid glycerides to 2,000 mg

    The active ingredient is passed through a No. 60 mesh U.S. sieve and suspended in the saturated fatty acid glycerides previously melted using the minimum heat necessary. The mixture is then poured into a suppository mold of nominal 2.0 g capacity and allowed to cool.
    • FORMULATION EXAMPLE 7
  • Suspensions, each containing 50 mg of medicament per 5.0 ml dose are made as follows:
    Ingredient Amount
    Compound of Example 111 50.0 mg
    Xanthan gum 4.0 mg
    Sodium carboxymethyl cellulose (11%) 50.0 mg
    Microcrystalline cellulose (89%)
    Sucrose 1.75 g
    Sodium benzoate 10.0 mg
    Flavor and Color q.v.
    Purified water to 5.0 ml

    The medicament, sucrose, and xanthan gum are blended, passed through a No. 10 mesh U.S. sieve, and then mixed with a previously made solution of the microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose in water. The sodium benzoate, flavor, and color are diluted with some of the water and added with stirring. Sufficient water is then added to produce the required volume.
    • FORMULATION EXAMPLE 8
  • Capsules, each containing 15 mg of medicament, are made as follows:
    Quantity
    Ingredient (mg/capsule)
    Compound of Example 112  15.0 mg
    Starch 407.0 mg
    Magnesium stearate  3.0 mg
    Total 425.0 mg

    The active ingredient, cellulose, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 425 mg quantities.
    • FORMULATION EXAMPLE 9
  • An intravenous formulation may be prepared as follows:
    Ingredient Quantity
    Compound of Example 120 250.0 mg
    Isotonic saline 1000 ml
    • FORMULATION EXAMPLE 10
  • A topical formulation may be prepared as follows:
    Ingredient Quantity
    Compound of Example 35 1-10 g
    Emulsifying Wax 30 g
    Liquid Paraffin 20 g
    White Soft Paraffin to 100 g

    The white soft paraffin is heated until molten. The liquid paraffin and emulsifying wax are incorporated and stirred until dissolved. The active ingredient is added and stirring is continued until dispersed. The mixture is then cooled until solid.
    • FORMULATION EXAMPLE 11
  • Sublingual or buccal tablets, each containing 10 mg of active ingredient, may be prepared as follows:
    Quantity
    Ingredient Per Tablet
    Compound of Example 95  10.0 mg
    Glycerol 210.5 mg
    Water 143.0 mg
    Sodium Citrate  4.5 mg
    Polyvinyl Alcohol  26.5 mg
    Polyvinylpyrrolidone  15.5 mg
    Total 410.0 mg

    The glycerol, water, sodium citrate, polyvinyl alcohol, and polyvinylpyrrolidone are admixed together by continuous stirring and maintaining the temperature at about 90° C. When the polymers have gone into solution, the resulting solution is cooled to about 50-55° C. and the medicament is slowly admixed. The homogenous mixture is poured into forms made of an inert material to produce a drug-containing diffusion matrix having a thickness of about 2-4 mm. This diffusion matrix is then cut to form individual tablets having the appropriate size.
  • Another preferred formulation employed in the methods of the present invention employs transdermal delivery devices (“patches”). Such transdermal patches may be used to provide continuous or discontinuous infusion of the compounds of the present invention in controlled amounts. The construction and use of transdermal patches for the delivery of pharmaceutical agents is well known in the art. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,023,252, issued Jun. 11, 1991, herein incorporated by reference. Such patches may be constructed for continuous, pulsatile, or on demand delivery of pharmaceutical agents.
  • Frequently, it will be desirable or necessary to introduce the pharmaceutical composition to the brain, either directly or indirectly. Direct techniques usually involve placement of a drug delivery catheter into the host's ventricular system to bypass the blood-brain barrier. One such implantable delivery system, used for the transport of biological factors to specific anatomical regions of the body, is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,011,472, which is herein incorporated by reference.
  • Indirect techniques, which are generally preferred, usually involve formulating the compositions to provide for drug latentiation by the conversion of hydrophilic drugs into lipid-soluble drugs or prodrugs. Latentiation is generally achieved through blocking of the hydroxy, carbonyl, sulfate, and primary amine groups present on the drug to render the drug more lipid soluble and amenable to transportation across the blood-brain barrier. Alternatively, the delivery of hydrophilic drugs may be enhanced by intra-arterial infusion of hypertonic solutions that can transiently open the blood-brain barrier.
  • The type of formulation employed for the administration of the compounds employed in the methods of the present invention may be dictated by the particular compounds employed, the type of pharmacokinetic profile desired from the route of administration and the compound(s), and the state of the patient.
  • While the invention has been illustrated and described in detail in the foregoing description, such an illustration and description is to be considered as exemplary and not restrictive in character, it being understood that only the illustrative embodiments have been shown and described and that all changes and modifications that come within the spirit of the invention are desired to be protected.

Claims (2)

1. A compound of the formula
Figure US20080090797A1-20080417-C00035
and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates thereof.
2. A composition comprising a compound of claim 1 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent, or excipient therefor, or a combination thereof.
US11/874,012 2001-10-12 2007-10-17 {Beta}-Lactamyl vasopression V1a antagonists and methods of use Abandoned US20080090797A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US11/874,012 US20080090797A1 (en) 2001-10-12 2007-10-17 {Beta}-Lactamyl vasopression V1a antagonists and methods of use

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US32905401P 2001-10-12 2001-10-12
PCT/US2002/032433 WO2003031407A2 (en) 2001-10-12 2002-10-11 β-LACTAMYL VASOPRESSIN VlaANTAGONISTS
US10/492,323 US7119083B2 (en) 2001-10-12 2002-10-11 β-Lactamyl vasopressin V1a Antagonists
US11/442,788 US7268125B2 (en) 2001-10-12 2006-05-30 β-lactamyl vasopressin V1a antagonists
US11/835,017 US20080033165A1 (en) 2001-10-12 2007-08-07 [Beta]-Lactamyl Vasopressin V1a Antagonists and Methods of Use
US11/874,012 US20080090797A1 (en) 2001-10-12 2007-10-17 {Beta}-Lactamyl vasopression V1a antagonists and methods of use

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/835,017 Continuation US20080033165A1 (en) 2001-10-12 2007-08-07 [Beta]-Lactamyl Vasopressin V1a Antagonists and Methods of Use

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20080090797A1 true US20080090797A1 (en) 2008-04-17

Family

ID=23283669

Family Applications (6)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/492,323 Expired - Lifetime US7119083B2 (en) 2001-10-12 2002-10-11 β-Lactamyl vasopressin V1a Antagonists
US11/442,788 Expired - Lifetime US7268125B2 (en) 2001-10-12 2006-05-30 β-lactamyl vasopressin V1a antagonists
US11/835,017 Abandoned US20080033165A1 (en) 2001-10-12 2007-08-07 [Beta]-Lactamyl Vasopressin V1a Antagonists and Methods of Use
US11/974,974 Abandoned US20080113959A1 (en) 2001-10-12 2007-10-17 {Beta}-Lactamyl vasopression V1a antagonists and methods of use
US11/874,012 Abandoned US20080090797A1 (en) 2001-10-12 2007-10-17 {Beta}-Lactamyl vasopression V1a antagonists and methods of use
US12/868,277 Abandoned US20110059935A1 (en) 2001-10-12 2010-08-25 Beta-LACTAMYL VASOPRESSIN V1a ANTAGONISTS

Family Applications Before (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/492,323 Expired - Lifetime US7119083B2 (en) 2001-10-12 2002-10-11 β-Lactamyl vasopressin V1a Antagonists
US11/442,788 Expired - Lifetime US7268125B2 (en) 2001-10-12 2006-05-30 β-lactamyl vasopressin V1a antagonists
US11/835,017 Abandoned US20080033165A1 (en) 2001-10-12 2007-08-07 [Beta]-Lactamyl Vasopressin V1a Antagonists and Methods of Use
US11/974,974 Abandoned US20080113959A1 (en) 2001-10-12 2007-10-17 {Beta}-Lactamyl vasopression V1a antagonists and methods of use

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/868,277 Abandoned US20110059935A1 (en) 2001-10-12 2010-08-25 Beta-LACTAMYL VASOPRESSIN V1a ANTAGONISTS

Country Status (11)

Country Link
US (6) US7119083B2 (en)
EP (1) EP1434763B1 (en)
JP (1) JP4494015B2 (en)
CN (4) CN103288815A (en)
AU (1) AU2002342045C1 (en)
CA (1) CA2462903C (en)
ES (1) ES2666188T3 (en)
HK (1) HK1225717A1 (en)
MX (1) MXPA04003358A (en)
NZ (1) NZ532033A (en)
WO (1) WO2003031407A2 (en)

Families Citing this family (18)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
NZ532033A (en) * 2001-10-12 2006-11-30 Azevan Pharmaceuticals Inc 2-(azetidin-2-on-1-yl)alkanedioic acid derivatives as vasopressin V1a receptor antagonists
WO2005035492A1 (en) * 2003-10-03 2005-04-21 Serenix Pharmaceuticals, Llc. 3-SUBSTITUTED β-LACTAMYL VASOPRESSIN V1A ANTAGONISTS
EP1868434A4 (en) * 2005-03-22 2011-10-26 Azevan Pharmaceuticals Inc Beta-lactamylalkanoic acids for treating premenstrual disorders
AU2013206201B2 (en) * 2005-03-22 2016-06-16 Azevan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Beta-lactamylalkanoic acids for treating premenstrual disorders
PL1910346T3 (en) * 2005-07-19 2019-09-30 Azevan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Beta-lactamyl phenylalanine, cysteine, and serine vasopressin antagonist
WO2007109615A2 (en) * 2006-03-21 2007-09-27 Azevan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. β -LACTAMYL VASOPRESSIN V2 ANTAGONISTS
WO2008034032A2 (en) * 2006-09-14 2008-03-20 Azevan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Beta-lactam cannabinoid receptor modulators
CN101821279A (en) 2007-08-15 2010-09-01 赛特凯恩蒂克公司 Some chemical entity, composition and method
WO2012003436A1 (en) * 2010-07-01 2012-01-05 Azevan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for treating post traumatic stress disorder
US9321956B2 (en) 2012-11-28 2016-04-26 Halliburton Energy Services, Inc. Methods for hindering the settling of particulates in a subterranean formation
EP2760880B1 (en) 2012-12-28 2015-07-08 Instytut Medycyny Doswiadczalnej I Klinicznej Peptidomimetics and their application
US9975879B2 (en) 2013-06-04 2018-05-22 Temple University Of The Commonwealth System Of Higher Education Beta lactams as modulators of glutamate uptake and methods for use thereof
EP3065724A4 (en) 2013-11-05 2017-05-03 Temple University Of The Commonwealth System Of Higher Education Polycationic amphiphiles as antimicrobial agents
US10398142B2 (en) 2013-11-05 2019-09-03 Temple University Of The Commonwealth System Of Higher Education Polycationic amphiphiles as antimicrobial agents
MX2021005502A (en) 2014-03-28 2023-01-16 Azevan Pharmaceuticals Inc Compositions and methods for treating neurodegenerative diseases.
BR112020005107A2 (en) 2017-09-15 2020-11-03 Azevan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. compositions and methods for the treatment of brain injury
TW201938171A (en) 2017-12-15 2019-10-01 匈牙利商羅特格登公司 Tricyclic compounds as vasopressin V1a receptor antagonists
HU231206B1 (en) 2017-12-15 2021-10-28 Richter Gedeon Nyrt. Triazolobenzazepines

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5759865A (en) * 1995-05-03 1998-06-02 Eli Lilly And Company Combinatorial process for synthesizing azetidinone analogs
US6204260B1 (en) * 1996-02-23 2001-03-20 Eli Lilly And Company Non-peptidyl vasopressin V1a antagonists
US6627625B1 (en) * 1999-08-16 2003-09-30 Revaax Pharmaceuticals, Llc Treatment of behavioral disorders with β-lactam compounds
US7119083B2 (en) * 2001-10-12 2006-10-10 Azevan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. β-Lactamyl vasopressin V1a Antagonists

Family Cites Families (28)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB1422263A (en) * 1973-01-30 1976-01-21 Ferrosan As 4-phenyl-piperidine compounds
US4314081A (en) * 1974-01-10 1982-02-02 Eli Lilly And Company Arloxyphenylpropylamines
NL7503310A (en) * 1975-03-20 1976-09-22 Philips Nv CONNECTIONS WITH ANTIDEPRESSIVE ACTION.
GB1526331A (en) * 1976-01-14 1978-09-27 Kefalas As Phthalanes
US4536518A (en) * 1979-11-01 1985-08-20 Pfizer Inc. Antidepressant derivatives of cis-4-phenyl-1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-1-naphthalenamine
FR2508035A1 (en) * 1981-06-23 1982-12-24 Fabre Sa Pierre ARYL-1-AMINOMETHYL-2 CYCLOPROPANES CARBOXAMIDE (Z) DERIVATIVES, THEIR PREPARATION AND THEIR USE AS MEDICAMENTS USEFUL IN THE TREATMENT OF CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM DISORDERS
US4761501A (en) * 1983-10-26 1988-08-02 American Home Products Corporation Substituted phenylacetamides
US4751299A (en) * 1983-11-18 1988-06-14 Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd. Optically active β-lactams and method of their production
US5023252A (en) * 1985-12-04 1991-06-11 Conrex Pharmaceutical Corporation Transdermal and trans-membrane delivery of drugs
US4734498A (en) * 1986-07-10 1988-03-29 Eli Lilly And Company 3β-succinimidoazetidinones as chiral intermediates
US4772694A (en) * 1986-07-24 1988-09-20 Eli Lilly And Company Chiral 3-(1,2,5-trisubstituted imidazolidinone) azetidinone antibiotic intermediates
US4956388A (en) * 1986-12-22 1990-09-11 Eli Lilly And Company 3-aryloxy-3-substituted propanamines
US5011472A (en) * 1988-09-06 1991-04-30 Brown University Research Foundation Implantable delivery system for biological factors
TW270927B (en) * 1992-10-16 1996-02-21 Otsuka Pharma Co Ltd
US5512563A (en) * 1993-07-29 1996-04-30 American Cyanamid Company Tricyclic benzazepine vasopressin antagonists
EP1000062B1 (en) * 1997-07-30 2004-09-22 Wyeth Tricyclic vasopressin agonists
US6403632B1 (en) * 2000-03-01 2002-06-11 Bristol Myers Squibb Pharma Co Lactam metalloprotease inhibitors
EP1049684A1 (en) * 1997-10-27 2000-11-08 Dr. Reddy's Research Foundation Novel tricyclic compounds and their use in medicine; process for their preparation and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
WO2003051314A2 (en) * 2001-12-18 2003-06-26 Medallion Biomedical, Llc Antibiotic compounds
US7135479B2 (en) * 2002-09-12 2006-11-14 Wyeth Antidepressant azaheterocyclylmethyl derivatives of heterocycle-fused benzodioxans
AU2004257267B2 (en) * 2003-07-14 2009-12-03 Arena Pharmaceuticals,Inc Fused-aryl and heteroaryl derivatives as modulators of metabolism and the prophylaxis and treatment of disorders related thereto
WO2005035492A1 (en) * 2003-10-03 2005-04-21 Serenix Pharmaceuticals, Llc. 3-SUBSTITUTED β-LACTAMYL VASOPRESSIN V1A ANTAGONISTS
US7745630B2 (en) * 2003-12-22 2010-06-29 Justin Stephen Bryans Triazolyl piperidine arginine vasopressin receptor modulators
EP1868434A4 (en) * 2005-03-22 2011-10-26 Azevan Pharmaceuticals Inc Beta-lactamylalkanoic acids for treating premenstrual disorders
PL1910346T3 (en) * 2005-07-19 2019-09-30 Azevan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Beta-lactamyl phenylalanine, cysteine, and serine vasopressin antagonist
WO2008034032A2 (en) * 2006-09-14 2008-03-20 Azevan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Beta-lactam cannabinoid receptor modulators
AU2007299822A1 (en) * 2006-09-22 2008-03-27 Janssen Pharmaceutica N.V. Spiro benzazepines as vasopressin antagonists
FR2930249B1 (en) * 2008-04-21 2010-05-14 Sanofi Aventis NOVEL 3-AMINOALKYL-1,3-DIHYDRO-2H-INDOL-2-ONE DERIVATIVES, THEIR PREPARATION AND THERAPEUTIC USE THEREOF

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5759865A (en) * 1995-05-03 1998-06-02 Eli Lilly And Company Combinatorial process for synthesizing azetidinone analogs
US6204260B1 (en) * 1996-02-23 2001-03-20 Eli Lilly And Company Non-peptidyl vasopressin V1a antagonists
US6627625B1 (en) * 1999-08-16 2003-09-30 Revaax Pharmaceuticals, Llc Treatment of behavioral disorders with β-lactam compounds
US7119083B2 (en) * 2001-10-12 2006-10-10 Azevan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. β-Lactamyl vasopressin V1a Antagonists
US7268125B2 (en) * 2001-10-12 2007-09-11 Azevan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. β-lactamyl vasopressin V1a antagonists

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US7268125B2 (en) 2007-09-11
CN101921267A (en) 2010-12-22
JP2005532984A (en) 2005-11-04
US20080033165A1 (en) 2008-02-07
CN103288815A (en) 2013-09-11
EP1434763A2 (en) 2004-07-07
AU2002342045B2 (en) 2009-02-19
HK1225717A1 (en) 2017-09-15
AU2002342045C1 (en) 2009-07-30
US20110059935A1 (en) 2011-03-10
CA2462903A1 (en) 2003-04-17
US20040266750A1 (en) 2004-12-30
CN1606554B (en) 2013-03-20
MXPA04003358A (en) 2004-07-08
NZ532033A (en) 2006-11-30
EP1434763B1 (en) 2018-01-17
WO2003031407A3 (en) 2003-11-13
JP4494015B2 (en) 2010-06-30
HK1076814A1 (en) 2006-01-27
ES2666188T3 (en) 2018-05-03
US20080113959A1 (en) 2008-05-15
CN1606554A (en) 2005-04-13
US20060217364A1 (en) 2006-09-28
CN105712985A (en) 2016-06-29
US7119083B2 (en) 2006-10-10
CA2462903C (en) 2011-09-20
WO2003031407A2 (en) 2003-04-17

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20080090797A1 (en) {Beta}-Lactamyl vasopression V1a antagonists and methods of use
US6610680B1 (en) Non-peptidyl vasopressin V1A antagonists
US8426400B2 (en) β-lactamyl phenylalanine, cysteine, and serine vasopressin antagonists
AU2002342045A1 (en) Beta-lactamyl vasopressin Vla antagonists
US20060281728A1 (en) 3-Substituted beta-lactamyl vasopressin v1a antagonists
WO2007109098A2 (en) HYDROXY AND KETO-SUBSTITUTED β-LACTAMYL ALKANEDIOIC ACIDS
WO2007109615A2 (en) β -LACTAMYL VASOPRESSIN V2 ANTAGONISTS
HK1189228A (en) β-LACTAMYL VASOPRESSIN V1AANTAGONISTS
HK1076814B (en) β-LACTAMYL VASOPRESSIN V1A ANTAGONISTS

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION